PENTAX Optio W90 digital camera Operating Manual
إعلان
إعلان
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe GmbH
(European Headquarters)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse, 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY
(HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(Germany - http://www.pentax.de)
Hotline: 0180 5 736829 / 0180 5 PENTAX
PENTAX U.K. Limited
Austria Hotline: 0820 820 255 (http://www.pentax.at)
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough,
Berks SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk) Hotline: 0870 736 8299
PENTAX France S.A.S.
112 Quai de Bezons - BP 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex, FRANCE
(http://www.pentax.fr)
Hotline: 0826 103 163 (0,15€ la minute) Fax: 01 30 25 75 76
Email: http://www.pentax.fr/_fr/photo/contact.php?photo&contact
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
PENTAX Canada Inc.
PENTAX Trading
(SHANGHAI) Limited
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, AZ 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7, CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
OPW900101/ENG Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
FOM 01.02.2010 Printed in Europe
Digital Camera
Operating Manual
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read the Operating Manual before using the camera.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 0 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX Digital Camera.
Please read this manual before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions. Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera’s capabilities.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken using the PENTAX Digital Camera that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
• PENTAX and Optio are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
• SDHC logo ( ) is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• ArcSoft
®
, and its logo are either the registered trademark or trademark of
ArcSoft Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Eye-Fi, the Eye-Fi connected are trademarks of Eye-Fi, Inc.
• This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. The PRINT
Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
• All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website. Thank you for your cooperation.
Refer to “Product Registration on the Internet” (p.266) for more information.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 1 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To users of this camera
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the display is manufactured using extremely high precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• A band of light may appear on the display if the camera is aimed at a bright subject. This is known as a smear, but it is not a malfunction.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen in this manual are different from the actual product.
• In this manual, both an SD Memory Card and an SDHC Memory Card are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a Macintosh hereafter.
• In this manual, the term “battery” refers to any type of batteries used for this camera and accessories.
Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.
Warning
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause serious personal injuries.
Caution
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
1
2
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 2 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
About the Camera
Warning
• Do not attempt to take the camera apart or modify the camera. High voltages are present within the camera, and there is a danger of electric shock if the camera is taken apart.
• If the inside of the camera should become exposed as a result of, for example, the camera being dropped, please do not under any circumstances touch such exposed portions, as there is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
• Wrapping the strap of the camera around your neck is also dangerous.
Please take care that small children do not hang the strap around their necks.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
Caution
• Do not place your finger on the flash when it is discharging as there is a risk of burns.
• Do not discharge the flash while it is touching your clothing as there is a risk of discoloring.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use, so please take care, as there is a risk of low temperature burns if such portions are held for long periods of time.
• Should the LCD be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin, in your eyes, or in your mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 3 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
About the Battery Charger and the AC Adapter
Warning
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100-
240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue its use and consult a
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX
Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If a thunder storm should occur while using the battery charger or AC adapter, unplug the AC plug cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause damage to the equipment, fire, or electric shock.
• Wipe off the plug of the AC plug cord if it becomes covered with dust. Dust on the plug may cause a fire.
Caution
• Do not place heavy objects on the AC plug cord, allow heavy objects to drop onto it or allow the AC plug cord to become damaged due to excessive bending. If the AC plug cord becomes damaged, consult a
PENTAX Service Center.
• Do not short or touch the output terminals of the product while it is still plugged in.
• Do not plug in the AC plug cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not subject the product to strong impacts or allow it to drop onto a hard surface. This can cause a malfunction.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge a battery other than a rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88. This can cause overheating, explosion, or battery charger failure.
3
4
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 4 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only a CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.
About the Battery
Warning
• Be sure to store the battery out of the reach of small children. Placing it in their mouths may cause an electric shock.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, it may cause a loss of sight. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately. Do not rub them.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI88 Battery Usage:
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE OR FIRE IF MISTREATED.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.
- DO NOT CHARGE EXCEPT SPECIFIED CHARGING CONDITION.
- DO NOT HEAT ABOVE 140°F / 60°C, OR SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT CRUSH OR MODIFY.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 5 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Keep the Camera and Accessories Away from Children
Warning
• Always keep the camera and accessories out of the reach of young children and infants.
1. The camera could fall unexpectedly and cause an injury.
2. Putting the strap around a child’s neck could cause asphyxiation.
3. Children may swallow small objects (such as the battery, SD memory card). If this happens contact a doctor immediately.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Starting Use
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media
(SD Memory Card), etc.
• The lens on this camera is not interchangeable. The lens is not removable.
About the Battery and Battery Charger
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.
Avoid storing it especially in high temperatures.
If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s service life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord supplied with the camera is for exclusive use with the battery charger D-BC88. Do not use it with any other equipment.
5
6
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 6 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Cautions when Carrying and Using the Camera
• Hot and humid places should be avoided. Particular care should be taken regarding vehicles, which can become very hot inside.
• Ensure that the camera is not subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure as this may cause damage, malfunction, or a loss in waterproof performance. Place the camera on a cushion for protection when the camera is subjected to the vibrations of a motorbike, car, ship, etc. If the camera is subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure, take your camera to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.
• The temperature range in which the camera can be used is -10°C to 40°C
(14°F to 104°F).
• The liquid crystal display will become black at high temperatures but will return to normal at normal temperatures.
• The response speed of the liquid crystal display becomes slow at low temperatures. This is due to the properties of the liquid crystal and is not a malfunction.
• If the camera is subjected to rapid temperature changes, condensation may form on the inside and outside of the camera. Therefore put the camera in a bag or plastic bag and take the camera out when the difference in temperature has subsided.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts.
These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the display. This could cause it to break or malfunction.
• Be careful not to sit down with the camera in your back pocket as this may damage the exterior of the camera or the display.
• When using a tripod with the camera, be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket on the camera.
About Repairs
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol or benzene.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens. Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 7 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
About Storage
• Avoid storing the camera where pesticides and chemicals are handled.
Remove the camera from its case and store it in a well-ventilated place to prevent the camera from becoming moldy during storage.
Others
• Periodic checks are recommended every 1 to 2 years in order to maintain high performance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using an SD Memory Card” (p.47) regarding
the SD Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting images or sound files, or formatting the SD
Memory Cards or the built-in memory does not completely erase the original data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
7
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 8 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and
Shockproof Design
• This camera is provided with a waterproof/dustproof design complying with
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (equivalent to IP68).
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX drop test (1.2 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX test for the waterproof, dustproof, and shockproof performance, but this does not guarantee it will remain free of trouble or damages.
• Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
Precautions Before Using the Camera in the
Water
Check the Following Before Going Near the Water
• Make sure that there are no cracks or scratches on the rubber seal of the battery/card and terminal covers.
Packing contact surface Waterproof packing
8
Packing contact surface
Waterproof packing
• Make sure there are no foreign objects (dust, sand, hair, lint or liquid) on the rubber seals or the surface they contact before closing the battery/card and terminal covers. Wipe off any foreign objects with a clean lint-free cloth.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 9 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Close the battery/card and terminal covers properly until they click.
Otherwise water may get in and damage the camera.
Be Careful Near the Water
• Avoid opening the battery/card and terminal covers when near the waterside or with wet hands. Wait until the camera is completely dry before changing the battery or the SD Memory Card. Avoid changing the battery or card where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• The camera will sink if dropped in water, so be sure to attach the strap and slip the strap over your wrist when using the camera in or near water.
• To enhance the waterproof performance of the camera, the front of the lens is protected by glass. As any dirt or water on the glass will affect the quality of pictures taken, the glass should be kept clean at all times.
Precautions When Using the Camera in the Water
• Do not use the camera deeper than 6 meters underwater. Do not use the camera underwater for more than 120 minutes consecutively.
• Do not open the battery/card and terminal covers underwater.
• Do not use in hot water or in a hot spring.
• Do not apply excessive force to the camera, for example diving into water with it. Doing so may compromise the waterproof performance of the camera or cause the covers to open.
• Leaving the camera on the sand at the beach may cause the camera to exceed its operating temperature or cause the speaker or microphone to become blocked with sand.
• Avoid subjecting the camera to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure as this may cause a loss in waterproof performance. If the camera is subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks or pressure, take your camera to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.
• Avoid getting sunscreen or sun oil on the camera as it may cause discoloration of the surface. If any oil gets on the camera, wash it off immediately with warm water.
• Sudden and extreme changes in temperature may cause condensation to form in and on the camera. Keep the camera in a bag or case to reduce the difference in temperature.
9
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 10 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Precautions After Using the Camera in the Water
• Do not open the battery/card cover or terminal cover if the camera is wet.
Wipe off any water with a clean lint-free cloth.
• The inside surface of the covers may get wet when they are opened. Wipe off any water that is on the cover.
• Wiping off the camera while there is sand or dust on it may scratch the surface of the camera. Make sure that the battery/card cover and terminal cover are firmly closed before washing the camera in tap water. After washing the camera, dry it with a soft cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt or sand on the waterproof packing or the packing contact surface. The camera’s waterproof performance may be compromised by loose packing or cracks or dents in the packing or packing contact surface.
If there is any such damage, contact your nearest PENTAX Service
Center.
• If the camera is very dirty or after it has been used in the sea, make sure that it is turned off and the battery/card and terminal covers are firmly closed before rinsing it under running tap water or leaving it in a bowl of clean water for a short time (2 or 3 minutes).
10
• Avoid cleaning with agents such as soapy water, mild detergents, or alcohol as this may compromise the waterproof performance of the camera.
• To maintain the waterproof performance of the camera, you are recommended to change the waterproof packing once a year. Contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center regarding changing the packing. (A charge will be made.)
• The camera’s accessories are not waterproof.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 11 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Contents
Using Your Camera Safely ...............................................................1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................5
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and Shockproof Design ............8
Precautions Before Using the Camera in the Water.........................8
Precautions When Using the Camera in the Water..........................9
Precautions After Using the Camera in the Water..........................10
Contents .........................................................................................11
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................17
Camera Features.................................................................................18
Checking the Contents of the Package ..........................................22
Names of Parts...............................................................................23
Names of Operating Parts ..............................................................24
Monitor Indications .........................................................................24
Attaching the Strap.............................................................................36
Attaching the Strap .........................................................................36
Attaching the Carabiner Strap ........................................................36
Powering the Camera .........................................................................38
Charging the Battery.......................................................................38
Installing the Battery .......................................................................39
Using the AC Adapter.....................................................................43
Installing the SD Memory Card..........................................................45
Number of Images Recordable on an SD Memory Card................48
Turning the Camera On and Off ........................................................49
Starting-up in the Playback Mode...................................................50
Setting the Display Language.........................................................51
Setting the Date and Time..............................................................55
Understanding the Button Functions ...............................................60
Mode .........................................................................................60
Mode ........................................................................................62
Switching Between A Mode and Q Mode...................................64
Setting the Camera Functions ...........................................................65
Operating the Menus ......................................................................65
Menu List ........................................................................................69
11
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 12 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
12
Taking Still Pictures............................................................................74
Taking Pictures...............................................................................74
Setting the Shooting Mode .............................................................78
Using the Face Detection Function ................................................81
Taking Pictures Automatically (Auto Picture Mode) .......................83
Setting the Functions (Program Mode)...........................................85
Taking Pictures in the Basic Mode (Green Mode)..........................86
Using the Zoom ..............................................................................87
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes (Night Scene, Night Scene
Portrait, Digital SR, Fireworks, and Candlelight Modes) ..........90
Taking Pictures of People (Portrait Mode)......................................91
Taking Pictures of Children (Kids Mode) ........................................93
Taking Pictures of Your Pet (Pet Mode) .........................................94
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities (Surf & Snow/
Sport Mode) .............................................................................97
Taking Pictures of Text (Text Mode) ..............................................98
Taking Pictures in Digital Microscope Mode...................................99
Framing Your Pictures (Frame Composite Mode)........................101
Using the Self-timer ......................................................................103
Taking a Series of Pictures (Continuous Shooting/
Burst Shooting) ......................................................................104
Taking Pictures Using the Remote Control Unit (Optional) ..........106
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot) .........................108
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure Adjustment
(Auto Bracket) ........................................................................110
Using the Digital Wide Function (Digital Wide Mode)...................111
Taking Panoramic Pictures (Digital Panorama Mode)..................114
Setting the Shooting Functions.......................................................117
Selecting the Flash Mode .............................................................117
Selecting the Focus Mode ............................................................119
Setting the Image Tone ................................................................124
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels....................................125
Selecting the Quality Level of Still Pictures ..................................127
Adjusting the White Balance.........................................................128
Setting the AE Metering................................................................130
Setting the Sensitivity ...................................................................131
Setting ISO Correction in AUTO...................................................132
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)....................................133
Correcting the Brightness (D-Range Setting) ...............................134
Setting Pixel Track SR..................................................................135
Setting the Interval Shooting ........................................................136
Setting Blink Detection .................................................................138
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 13 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Instant Review............................................................139
Setting the Green Button ..............................................................139
Setting the Image Sharpness (Sharpness)...................................143
Setting the Saturation/Tone Adjustment.......................................144
Setting the Image Contrast (Contrast)..........................................145
Setting the Date Imprint Function .................................................145
Setting the Macro Light.................................................................146
Taking Pictures Underwater ............................................................148
Taking Underwater Pictures (Underwater Mode/Underwater
Movie Mode) ..........................................................................148
Recording Movies .............................................................................150
Recording Movies.........................................................................150
Setting the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction) Function............153
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set Interval
(Interval Movie) ......................................................................154
Saving the Settings (Memory) .........................................................158
Playing Back and Deleting Images 161
Playing Back Images ........................................................................162
Playing Back Still Pictures ............................................................162
Playing Back a Movie ...................................................................163
Multi-Image Display ......................................................................164
Using the Playback Function ........................................................166
Slideshow .....................................................................................169
Rotating the Image .......................................................................172
Zoom Playback.............................................................................173
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically (Face Close-up
Playback) ...............................................................................174
Deleting Images and Sound Files....................................................176
Deleting a Single Image/Sound File .............................................176
Deleting Selected Images and Sound Files..................................178
Deleting All Images and Sound Files............................................179
Recovering Deleted Images .........................................................180
Protecting Images and Sound Files from Deletion (Protect) ........181
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment......................................184
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack .................................184
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal .............................186
13
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 14 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
14
Editing and Printing Images 189
Editing Images ..................................................................................190
Changing the Image Size (Resize)...............................................190
Cropping Images ..........................................................................191
Processing Images So That Faces Look Smaller.........................192
Using the Digital Filters.................................................................194
Using the Ink Rubbing Filter .........................................................199
Creating a Collage Image.............................................................200
Red-eye Compensation................................................................205
Adding a Frame (Frame Composite) ............................................206
Overlaying Your Original Frame on an Image ..............................209
Editing Movies ..............................................................................214
Copying Images and Sound Files.................................................217
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)................................................219
Printing a Single Image ................................................................219
Printing All Images........................................................................221
Recording and Playing Back Sound 223
Recording Sound (Voice Recording Mode)....................................224
Setting Voice Recording ...............................................................224
Recording Sounds ........................................................................225
Playing Back Sound .....................................................................226
Adding a Voice Memo to Images.....................................................228
Recording a Voice Memo .............................................................228
Playing Back a Voice Memo.........................................................229
Camera Settings................................................................................232
Formatting an SD Memory Card...................................................232
Changing the Sound Settings.......................................................233
Changing the Date and Time........................................................235
Setting the Alarm ..........................................................................237
Setting the World Time .................................................................239
Setting the Text Size on the Menu ...............................................242
Changing the Display Language ..................................................243
Changing the System for Naming Folders....................................244
Changing the Video Output Format..............................................246
Selecting the HDMI Output Format ..............................................247
Setting the Eye-Fi Communication ...............................................249
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display ........................................250
Using the Power Saving Function ................................................251
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 15 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting Auto Power Off .................................................................252
Setting the Quick Zoom Function .................................................253
Setting the Guide Display .............................................................254
Perform Pixel Mapping .................................................................255
Registering the Subscreen Image (Subscreen Input)...................256
Changing the Start-up Screen ......................................................257
Resetting to Default Settings (Reset) ...........................................258
Displaying the Clock Mode ...........................................................259
Setting Up Your Computer...............................................................262
Provided Software ........................................................................262
System Requirements ..................................................................263
Installing the Software ..................................................................264
Setting the USB Connection Mode...............................................267
Connecting to a Windows PC ..........................................................269
Connecting the Camera and Your Windows PC ..........................269
Transferring Images .....................................................................270
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Windows PC.....................273
Starting “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”................................274
Viewing Images ............................................................................277
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”.........278
Connecting to a Macintosh ..............................................................279
Connecting the Camera and Your Macintosh...............................279
Transferring Images .....................................................................280
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Macintosh .........................281
Starting “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”................................282
Viewing Images ............................................................................284
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”.........284
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi Card ....................................285
Functions Available for Each Shooting Mode................................288
Troubleshooting................................................................................293
Default Settings.................................................................................295
List of World Time Cities..................................................................300
Optional Accessories .......................................................................301
Main Specifications ..........................................................................302
Warranty Policy.................................................................................307
15
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 16 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
In this manual, the method for operating the four-way controller is shown in illustrations, such as in the one below.
2
or
or
4
5
or
3
or
16
The meanings of the symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
1
Indicates the reference page number for an explanation of the related operation.
Indicates information that is useful to know.
A
Mode
Q
Mode
Indicates precautions to be taken when operating the camera.
This is the mode for taking still pictures and movies. In this manual, “Still Picture Capture Mode” is the mode for taking still pictures while “C mode” is the mode for taking movies.
This is the mode for viewing still pictures and playing back movies and sound files.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 17 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Composition of the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1 Getting Started –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains what you need to do after purchasing the camera before you start taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the instructions.
2 Common Operations ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains common operations such as the functions of the buttons and how to use the menus. For more details, refer to the respective chapters below.
3 Taking Pictures ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains the various ways of capturing images and how to set the relevant functions.
4 Playing Back and Deleting Images–––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to view still pictures and movies on the camera or on a TV and how to delete images, sound files, and movies from the camera.
5 Editing and Printing Images ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains the various ways of printing still pictures and how to edit images with the camera.
6 Recording and Playing Back Sound –––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to record sound files or add sound (a voice memo) to an image and how to play back sound files.
7 Settings –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to set camera-related functions.
8 Connecting to a Computer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
9 Appendix––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
This chapter deals with troubleshooting and lists the optional accessories.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
17
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 18 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Camera Features
In addition to basic picture-taking, the Optio W90 has a variety of shooting modes to suit different situations. This section describes how to make the most of the key features of your camera. Together with the explanations of camera operations, it will enable you to enjoy your camera to the fullest.
Suitable for Outdoor Activities
The Optio W90 is both waterproof and dustproof and has a tough body.
You need not worry about sprays of water while fishing or unexpected rain or dust while trekking.
Functions that expand photo opportunities to the sea, the hills, and the rivers
• Waterproof at a depth of 6 meters (19.7 ft.)
• Take pictures underwater for two hours
• Covers can be locked*1
• Shockproof performance*2
• Water repellent coating on the lens cover glass.
18
*1 This camera has locks for the battery/card and terminal covers. The battery compartment and the card and terminal compartment are not waterproof or dustproof. Lock the covers properly before approaching anyplace that is wet or dirty.
*2 The camera satisfies the PENTAX drop test (1.2 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method
516.5-Shock testing.
• Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
• The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damages under every condition.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 19 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
For taking enlarged pictures of very close objects such as the veins of leaves or specimens of tiny insects in
Digital Microscope mode (p.99).
For creating an image like an ink rubbing using the Ink
Easy-to-Navigate Capture and Playback Functions!
The user-friendly design of the
Optio W90 enables easy operation with only a few buttons.
Simply by choosing the appropriate icon, you can select
choose the optimal settings for
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
X
X
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XX the situation, or the playback
various playback and editing functions. A guide on the display lets you check the functions available in each mode and how to use them.
A shooting mode guide is displayed in the Capture Mode
Palette and a playback mode guide in the Playback Mode
Use the Green Mode to take pictures easily using standard
19
20
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 20 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Perfect for Portrait Shots!
The Optio W90 comes with a “Face Detection” function that spots the faces in your shot and automatically adjusts the focus and exposure for the faces. It can recognize up to 32 people per shot (*), so it will help you take perfect group shots too. It will automatically release the shutter when people are smiling, or if anyone blinked, it will tell you that so you can take the shot again until it is perfect. It also has a feature that lets you enlarge each person’s face in sequence during playback so you can quickly check their facial expressions.
* Up to 31 face detection frames are displayed on the monitor.
Face Detection function (p.81).
Modes for taking stunning pictures of people (p.91).
Close-ups of people’s faces for easy checking during
Advanced Movie Recording Functions!
The Optio W90 includes Movie SR to reduce camera shake during movie
recording (p.153). It also supports 1280×720 HDTV so you can view
your recordings as stunning wide-screen movies.
Use the camera to shoot fun-filled movies of your children or pets as a visual diary of their development
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 21 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
A Multitude of Functions inside the Camera for
Enjoying Images Without a Computer!
The Optio W90 has a variety of functions to let you enjoy playing back and editing images without having to connect the camera to your computer and transfer the images first. The camera is all you need to take and edit still
pictures and movies (p.190). And
no more worries about accidentally deleting images, because now, with the Optio
W90, you can recover them again
Resize (p.190), Cropping (p.191) and Red-eye
Compensation (p.205) can be used, while the image is
displayed in the playback mode.
You can divide a movie in two or select a frame from a
movie to save it as a still picture (p.214).
21
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 22 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Checking the Contents of the Package
Camera
Optio W90
Strap
O-ST104 (*)
Carabiner strap
O-ST103 (*)
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW102
USB cable
I-USB7 (*)
AV cable
I-AVC7 (*)
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88 (*)
Battery charger
D-BC88 (*)
AC plug cord
22
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX digital camera.
The Optio W90 is waterproof, dustproof, and shockproof, as shown below, so you can use it in a wide range of outdoor activities.
Waterproof/dustproof: JIS grade 8 waterproof and grade 6 dustproof (IP68)
Shockproof: Satisfies Pentax drop test (1.2 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-
Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.
* Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
* The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damage under every condition.
Quick Guide Operating Manual
(this manual)
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are also available as optional accessories.
The battery charger and AC plug cord are only sold as a set (battery charger kit
K-BC88).
For other optional accessories, refer to “Optional Accessories” (p.301).
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 23 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Names of Parts
Front
Shutter release button
Power switch/
Power lamp (green)
Speaker/
Microphone
Flash
Lens
Remote control receiver
Self timer lamp/
Focus assist
Macro light
Back
Terminal cover
Terminal cover lock lever
Display
Tripod socket
Battery/card cover lock lever
Battery/card cover
PC/AV terminal HDMI terminal Battery lock lever
23
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 24 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Names of Operating Parts
Power switch
Shutter release button w /x/f/y button
Q button
I
button
Four-way controller
4/W button
Green/i button
3 button
Refer to “Understanding the Button Functions” (p.60 - 63) for an
explanation of the function of each button.
24
Monitor Indications
Display in A Mode
The display changes in the following sequence each time you press the
4/W button: “Normal Display”, “Histogram + Info”, “No Info”,
“LCD Off”, “Simple Display + Subscreen”.
• All the camera buttons function as normal even when the LCD is off.
Press the shutter release button to take pictures as normal.
•
Y appears if you press the shutter release button halfway when camera shake is likely to occur. To prevent the camera from shaking, use a tripod, a remote controller (optional) and/or the self-timer
• You cannot turn off the LCD or change the information on the display to “Simple Display + Subscreen” in N (Frame Composite) and
F (Digital Panorama) modes.
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4/
W button in 9 (Green) mode or X (Digital Wide) mode.
• In (Digital Microscope) mode, the 4/W button only switches between the Normal display and the No Info display.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 25 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Normal Display
38
OK
Simple Display + Subscreen
38
OK
OK
Histogram + Info
38
12
M
OK
LCD Off
OK
No Info
25
26
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 26 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Normal Display in Still Picture Capture Mode
11 12 13 14 15
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
5
6
7
P
DATE
+ 1 . 0
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
3 8
18 19
2 Battery level indicator (p.42)
4 Date Imprint setting (p.145)
6 Shutter speed
7 Aperture
10 Remaining image storage capacity
16
17
14 Eye-Fi communication status
15 Digital Zoom/Intelligent Zoom
* 6 and 7 are only displayed when the shutter release button is pressed half-way.
* For 8, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the
[A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there is a danger of camera shake.
* For 13, when the focus mode is set to = and the Auto Macro function
is activated, the q appears on the display (p.119).
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 27 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
* 14 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in [W Setting] menu.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.
* 17 disappears two seconds after the camera is turned on.
* 19 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
P
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
Q
When [Shadow Correction] is set to O
O
When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to O
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to
P
(Off), nothing appears in 19.
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.
27
28
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 28 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Histogram + Info/No Info Display in Still Picture Capture Mode
A1 to A21 and B3 appear when “Histogram + Info” is selected. Only B3 appears when “No Info” is selected.
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
A6
A7
A8
P
DATE
+ 1 . 0
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
3 8
12M
B3
A14
A15
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21
A2 Battery level indicator (p.42)
A4 Date Imprint setting (p.145)
A6 Pixel Track SR icon (p.135)
A8 Remaining image storage capacity
A10 Drive mode (p.103 - p.110)
A12 Eye-Fi communication status
A13 Digital Zoom/Intelligent Zoom
A14 Histogram (p.34)
A16 World time setting
B1 Shutter speed
B2 Aperture
* For A6, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the
[A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there is a danger of camera shake.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 29 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
* A12 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in
[W Setting] menu.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.
* A17 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
P
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
Q
When [Shadow Correction] is set to O
O
When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to O
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to
P
(Off), nothing appears in A17.
* B1 and B2 are only displayed when the shutter release button is pressed half-way.
* When the shooting mode is b (Auto Picture) and if you press the shutter release button halfway, the automatically selected shooting
mode appears in A1 even when “No Info” is selected (p.83).
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.
* When there is an area on the screen that is so bright it appears white, the indicated area blinks red as a warning. Similarly, when there is an area that is so dark it appears black, the indicated area blinks yellow as a warning.
29
30
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 30 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Simple Display + Subscreen in Still Picture Capture Mode
7 8 9
10
1
2
11
3
4
5
6
3 8
12 13
2 Battery level indicator (p.42)
4 Camera shake reduction icon
6 Remaining image storage capacity
12 Digital Zoom/
13 Eye-Fi communication status
* For 9, when the focus mode is set to = and the Auto-Macro function
is activated, the q appears on the display (p.119).
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 31 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Display in Q Mode
The display shows the shooting information of the image in the playback mode. The display changes in the following sequence each time you press the 4/W button:
The display cannot be changed by pressing the 4/W button while playing back a voice memo/movie or pausing playback.
Normal Display
Edit
OK
Histogram + Info
OK
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
Edit
OK
No Info
Edit
OK
Simple Display + Subscreen
Edit
31
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 32 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
32
Histogram + Info Display in Playback Mode
(All of the display items are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
The display shows information such as the shooting conditions. A1 to
A11 also appear when “Normal Display” is selected. B1 to B8 appear only when “Histogram + Info” is selected.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
A6
1 / 2 5 0
F 3 . 5
Edit
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B3
B4
B5 B6 B7 B8
A2 Playback mode
Q
K
L
A3 Battery level indicator (p.42)
A6 Four-way controller guide
A7 File number
A10 Eye-Fi communication status
A11 Volume icon
B1 Shutter speed
B2 Aperture
B3 Histogram (p.34)
* A1 appears only if the Face Detection function worked when the image was shot.
* In “Normal Display”, A3 disappears if no operation is performed for two seconds.
* A6 appears even when “No Info” is selected, but disappears if no operation is performed for two seconds. When no operation is performed for two seconds in “Normal Display” or “Histogram + Info”, only “Edit” disappears.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 33 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
* A11 appears only when the volume is being adjusted during playback
of movies, sounds, or voice memos (p.163, p.226, p.229).
* When “Normal Display” is selected, the current date and time appears for two seconds in the B4 to B8 positions.
* When there is an area on the screen that is so bright it appears white, the indicated area blinks red. Similarly, when there is an area that is so dark it appears black, the indicated area blinks yellow.
Simple Display + Subscreen in Playback Mode
4 5
1
2
6
3
Edit
1 Next image
2 Previous image
3 Four-way controller guide
4 Volume icon
5 Eye-Fi communication status
* For 3, when no operation is performed for two seconds, only “Edit” disappears.
Guide Display
A guide for each available button operation appears as follows on the display during operation.
2
3
4
5
MENU
Four-way controller (2)
Four-way controller (3)
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
3 button
OK
SHUTTER
X , i
I
, J
Zoom button
4/W button
Shutter release button
Green/i button
I
button
33
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 34 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Histogram
A histogram shows the brightness distribution of an image. The horizontal axis represents brightness (dark at the left and bright at the right) and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels.
The shape of the histogram
(Dark)
←Brightness→
(Bright)
before and after shooting tells
Dark portions Bright portions
you whether the brightness and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to use EV compensation and take the picture again.
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation) 1p.133
Understanding Brightness
If the brightness is correct, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.
Dark image Correct image Bright image
34
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off (bright portions).
The Optio W90 has a function where bright portions are indicated as blinking red and dark portions as blinking yellow.
Understanding Contrast
The graph peaks gradually for images in which contrast is balanced. The graph peaks on both sides but sinks in the middle for images with a large difference in contrast and low amounts of mid-level brightness.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 35 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Getting Started
Attaching the Strap ................................... 36
Powering the Camera ............................... 38
Installing the SD Memory Card ................ 45
Turning the Camera On and Off .............. 49
Initial Settings ........................................... 51
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 36 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Attaching the Strap
1
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap (O-ST104) supplied with the camera.
1
Pass the narrow end of the strap through the strap lug.
2
Pass the other end of the strap through the loop and pull tight.
Attaching the Carabiner Strap
Attach the carabiner strap (O-ST103) supplied with the camera.
36
1
Pass the narrow end of the strap through the strap lug on the camera.
2
Fix the end of the strap to the stopper.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 37 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Protective rubber ring
The carabiner has rubber rings to prevent damage to the display. These rubber rings cushion the impact when the carabiner hits the display.
Be sure to adjust the position of the rubber rings as shown in the figure below for the best results before using the carabiner strap.
1
37
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 38 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Powering the Camera
1
Charging the Battery
Use the supplied battery charger (D-BC88) to charge the supplied rechargeable lithium-ion battery (D-LI88) before using it in the camera for the first time or after a long period of non-use, or when the
[Battery depleted] message appears.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6 ft (1.8 m)”
Charging indicator
While charging: Lights
Charging finished: Turns off
3 2
To power outlet
Battery
1
AC plug cord
Battery charger
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
2
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
3
Place the battery in the battery charger so that the
PENTAX logo is facing up.
The charging indicator turns on while charging.
When charging is finished, the charging indicator turns off.
4
Remove the battery from the battery charger when charging is finished.
38
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 39 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Do not charge batteries other than the rechargeable lithium ion D-LI88 battery using the supplied D-BC88 battery charger. Doing otherwise may cause damage or overheating.
• The battery has reached the end of its service life when it starts to run down soon after being charged. Replace it with a new battery.
• If the battery is inserted correctly but the charging indicator fails to light, the battery may be faulty. Replace it with a new battery.
1
The time required to fully charge the battery is about 120 minutes (max.).
(The charging time may vary depending on the ambient temperature and charging conditions.) The appropriate ambient temperature for charging the battery is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
Installing the Battery
Use the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88 that is provided with the camera. Charge the battery before using it in the camera for the first time.
Battery lock lever
Battery/card cover lock lever
Battery
Battery/card cover
1
Open the battery/card cover.
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1, slide the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3.
39
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 40 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
2
Using the side of the battery to press the battery lock
lever in the direction of 4, insert the battery with the
PENTAX logo pointing toward the lens.
Push the battery in until it is locked in place.
Make sure that the battery is inserted with the PENTAX logo pointing toward the lens. If the battery is incorrectly oriented, malfunction may result.
3
Close the battery/card cover.
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction indicated by 2, slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is securely closed.
Removing the Battery
1
Open the battery/card cover.
2
Press the battery lock lever towards 4.
The battery will be ejected. Take care not to drop the battery when removing it.
40
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 41 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
• If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it, water, sand, or dirt may get into the camera.
• This camera uses a rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88. Use of any other type of battery may damage the camera and cause malfunction.
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is incorrectly oriented, malfunction may result.
• Do not remove the battery while the camera is turned on.
• When storing the battery for more than 6 months, charge the battery for 30 minutes using the battery charger and store the battery separately.
Be sure to recharge the battery every 6 to 12 months. Storing the battery below room temperature is ideal. Avoid storing it in high temperatures.
• The date and time may be returned to the default setting if the camera is left without the battery for a long time.
• Be careful as the camera or the battery may become hot when the camera is used continuously for a long period of time.
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the battery. Avoid changing the battery where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• Battery performance may deteriorate as temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold regions, we recommend carrying a spare battery in your pocket to keep it warm. Battery performance will return to normal in normal temperatures.
1
41
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 42 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
• Image Storage Capacity, Movie Recording Time, Sound
Recording Time, and Playback Time
(at 23°C or 73.4°F with the display on and the battery fully charged)
Image Storage
Capacity
*1
(flash used for 50% of shots)
Approx. 205 pictures
Movie Recording
Time
*2
Sound Recording
Time
*2
Playback Time
*2
Approx. 85 min.
Approx. 300 min.
Approx. 250 min.
*1 Recording capacity shows approximate number of shots recorded during CIPA-compliant testing (with display on, flash used for 50% of the shots, and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may vary according to operating conditions.
*2 According to the results of in-house testing.
• In general, battery performance may temporarily deteriorate as the temperature decreases.
• Be sure to take a spare battery with you when traveling abroad or to a cold region, or if you intend to take a lot of pictures.
• Battery Level Indicator
You can check the battery level by the indicator on the display.
Screen Display
(green)
(green)
(yellow)
(red)
[Battery depleted]
Battery Status
Adequate power remains.
Battery is running low.
Battery is running very low.
Battery is exhausted.
The camera will turn off after this message appears.
42
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 43 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the AC Adapter
Use of the optional AC adapter kit (K-AC88) is recommended if you intend to use the camera for a long time or connect it to a computer.
1
1
6
5
DC terminal
4
3
DC coupler
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off and open the battery/card cover.
2
Remove the Battery.
Refer to p.39 - p.40 on how to open the battery/card cover and remove
the battery.
3
Insert the DC coupler.
Using the side of the DC coupler to press the battery lock lever, insert the DC coupler. Confirm that the DC coupler is locked in place.
The battery/card cover will not close while the DC coupler is inserted.
Leave the cover open when using the AC adapter and do not attempt to close it.
4
Connect the DC terminal of the AC adapter to the DC terminal of the DC coupler.
5
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
6
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
43
1
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 44 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adapter.
• Make sure that the AC plug cord and the DC terminal connecting the
AC adapter to the camera are inserted securely. Data may be lost if either becomes disconnected while data is being recorded on the SD
Memory Card or the built-in memory.
• Use the AC adapter with due care to avoid fire or electric shock.
Be sure to read “About the Battery Charger and the AC Adapter” (p.3)
before using the AC adapter.
• Be sure to read the operation manual accompanying the AC adapter kit K-AC88 before using the adapter.
• When connecting the AC adapter, you cannot set the camera upright on the table because the cord from the DC coupler comes out of the bottom of the camera.
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
44
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 45 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Installing the SD Memory Card
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card.
(Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Captured images and sound files are saved on the SD Memory Card if a card is inserted in the camera. They are saved in the built-in memory if a card is
1
• Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory
Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital
devices. Refer to “Formatting an SD Memory Card” (p.232) for
instructions on formatting.
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the SD Memory
Card. Avoid changing the card where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.
• The still picture storage capacity varies depending on the capacity of the SD Memory Card and the selected number of recorded pixels and
• The power lamp blinks while the SD Memory Card is being accessed
(data is being recorded or read).
Backing Up Data
The camera may not be able to access data in the built-in memory in the case of a malfunction. Use a computer or other device to back up important data in another location.
45
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 46 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
46
SD Memory Card socket
Battery/card cover
SD Memory Card
1
Open the battery/card cover.
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1, slide the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3.
2
Insert the SD Memory Card into the SD Memory Card socket so that the label is facing toward the front of the camera (the side with the lens).
Push the card in all the way. Images and sound may not be recorded correctly if the card is not inserted all the way.
3
Close the battery/card cover.
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction indicated by 2, slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is securely closed.
To Remove the SD Memory Card
1
Open the battery/card cover.
2
Push the card into the SD Memory Card socket to eject it.
Pull the card out.
If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it, water, sand, or dirt may get into the camera.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 47 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Precautions When Using an SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a write-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being recorded on the card, the stored data from being deleted, and the card from being formatted by the camera or a computer.
r appears on the display when the card is write-protected.
Write-protect switch
• Care should be taken when removing the SD Memory Card immediately after using the camera, as the card may be hot.
• Keep the card cover closed and do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the camera while the image is being written or played back from the SD
Memory Card or while connected to a computer with a USB cable. Doing so may result in data corruption or damage to the card.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away from water and store away from high temperature.
• Never remove the SD Memory Card while it is being formatted. This may damage the card and make it unusable.
• The data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances. We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted. This includes the following:
(1) When the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) When the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) When the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) When the SD Memory Card is ejected or the battery is removed while the data on the card is being recorded or accessed.
• If it is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable.
Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or where it may be exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• When using an SD Memory Card with a slow recording speed, recording may stop while you are taking movies even when there is adequate space in the memory, or shooting and playback may take a long time.
• Be sure to format SD Memory Cards that are unused or have been used on
another camera. Refer to “Formatting an SD Memory Card” (p.232).
1
47
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 48 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Number of Images Recordable on an SD Memory
Card
The size of a recorded image differs depending on the number of recorded pixels of the images. This affects the number of images that can be saved on an SD Memory Card.
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels for still pictures on the
[A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels 1p.125
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and frame rate in
[Movie] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and Frame Rate for Movies
1
For an approximate guide to the number of images or the length of
recorded movies that can be saved on an SD Memory Card, see “Main
48
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 49 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Turning the Camera On and Off
Power switch/Power lamp
1
1
Press the power switch.
The camera turns on and both the power lamp and display turn on.
If the [Language/ ] screen or [Date Adjustment] screen appears
when you turn the camera on, follow the procedure on p.51 to set the
display language and/or current date and time.
2
Press the power switch again.
The camera turns off and both the power lamp and display turn off.
Checking the SD Memory Card
The SD Memory Card is checked when the camera turns on and the memory status is displayed.
a
+ r
The SD Memory Card is inserted. Images and sound files will be saved on the SD
Memory Card.
The SD Memory Card is not inserted.
Images and sound files will be saved in the built-in memory.
The write-protect switch on the SD Memory
Card is in the LOCK position (p.47). Images and sounds cannot be recorded.
38
Memory status
49
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 50 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Starting-up in the Playback Mode
Use this function when you want to play back images or sound files straightaway without taking any pictures.
Power switch
Q
button
1
Press the power switch while holding down the Q
button.
The display turns on and the camera starts up in playback mode.
To switch from Playback Mode to A mode, press the Q button or press the shutter release button halfway.
Playing Back Still Pictures 1p.162
50
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 51 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Initial Settings
The [Language/ ] screen appears when the camera is turned on for
the first time. Perform the operations in “Setting the Display Language”
below to set the language, and in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.55) to
set the current date and time.
The language, date, and time can be changed later. Refer to the pages below for instructions.
• To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
1
Setting the Display Language
1
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the
display language.
MENU
Cancel
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
OK
OK
51
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 52 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language. If the desired settings for [Hometown] and [DST]
(Daylight Saving Time) appear, proceed to Step 3.
Proceed to “To Set Hometown and
DST” (p.54) if the desired settings do not appear.
3
Press the four-way controller
(3) twice to select [Settings
complete].
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
MENU Cancel
Daylight saving time
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Set the date and time by
following the procedure in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.55).
OK OK
52
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 53 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
If you accidentally select the wrong language and go to the next procedure, perform the following operation to set the language back.
When the Wrong Language Has Been Inadvertently Selected
1
Press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
language and press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language.
When the Screen After Step 2 Appears in the Wrong Language
1
Press the 3 button.
This exits the settings screen and returns the camera to capture mode.
2
Press the 3 button.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (32) to select [Language/
].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/ ] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
language.
7
Press the 4 button.
The [W Setting] menu appears in the selected language.
The language is now switched to your desired language. To reset [Hometown],
[Date] and [Time], refer to the pages below for instructions.
• To change [Hometown], follow the steps in “Setting the World Time”
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
1
53
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 54 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
To Set Hometown and DST
3
Press the four-way controller
(3).
The frame moves to [W Hometown].
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
Settings complete
DST
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose a city.
MENU Cancel
Hometown
New York City
DST
MENU Cancel
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [DST] (Daylight Saving Time).
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen reappears.
9
Press the four-way controller
(3) to select [Settings
complete].
Initial Setting
English
Hometown
New York
DST
Settings complete
OK OK
MENU Cancel OK OK
10
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Next, set the date and time.
54
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 55 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
The video output format (NTSC/PAL) is set to the format of the city selected in
[Hometown] on the [Initial Setting] screen. See the following pages for information on the available video output formats and how to change the initial settings.
• Video output formats available initially: “List of World Time Cities” (1p.300)
• To change the video out format, follow the steps in “Changing the Video
1
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display format.
1
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the date and
time display format.
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].
MENU Cancel mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [24h] (24-hour
display) or [12h] (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
MENU Cancel
55
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 56 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
6
Press the four-way controller
(3).
The frame moves to [Date].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
9
Press the four-way controller
(3) to select [Settings
complete].
MENU Cancel
7
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the month.
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Change the day and year in the same manner.
Next, change the time.
If you selected [12h] in step 4, the setting switches between am and pm corresponding to the time.
Date
Time
MENU Cancel mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
Time 00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
10
Press the 4 button.
This confirms the date and time.
If you press the 4 button in step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.
When the [Initial Setting] or [Date Adjustment] screen is displayed, you can cancel the setting operation and switch to the capture mode by pressing the 3 button. In this case, the [Initial Setting] screen will appear next time you turn the camera on.
56
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 57 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
[Language/ ], [Date], [Time], [Hometown] and [DST] can be changed. Refer to the pages below for instructions.
• To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and
• To change the city or turn DST on and off, follow the steps in “Setting the
1
57
58
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 58 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 59 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Common Operations
Understanding the Button Functions ..... 60
Setting the Camera Functions ................. 65
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 60 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Understanding the Button Functions
A
Mode
2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
9
1
Power switch
Turns the camera on and off (p.49).
2
Shutter release button
Focuses the camera on the subject when pressed halfway in Still
Picture Capture Mode (except when the focus mode is set to 3, s,
Takes a still picture when pressed down fully (p.75).
Pressing down fully starts and stops movie recording in C (Movie) and
(Underwater Movie) modes (p.148, p.151).
Pressing down fully starts and stops sound file recording in O (Voice
3 w
/xbutton
Changes the captured area (p.87).
4
Q
button
Switches to the Q mode (p.64).
5 3 button
Displays the [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.65).
60
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 61 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
I
button
Switches the Face Detection function (p.81). The Face Detection
function is switched as follows each time the I button is pressed:
Smile Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On
The Face Detection function cannot be set to off in b (Auto Picture)/
B (Night Scene Portrait)/P (Portrait)/R (Kids) modes.
7
Four-way controller
(2)
: Changes the drive mode (p.103 - p.110).
(3)
: Displays the Capture Mode Palette (p.79).
(4)
: Changes the flash mode (p.117).
(5)
: Changes the focus mode (p.119).
(23) : Adjusts the focus when the focus mode is set to \ (p.120).
8 4/W button
Changes the information on the display (p.24).
9
Green button
Switches to the 9 (Green) mode (p.86).
Calls up the assigned function (p.139).
2
61
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 62 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Q
Mode
1
2
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
9
1
Power switch
Turns the camera on and off (p.49).
2
Shutter release button
Switches to A mode (p.64).
3 f
/y button
In single-image display, pressing f switches to 6-image display.
Pressing f again switches to 12-image display (p.164). Press y to
return to the previous display.
In single-image display, pressing y enlarges the image. Press f to
return to the previous display (p.173).
In 12-image display press f to change to folder or calendar display (p.165).
In folder/calendar display, press y to change to 12-image display
Adjusts the volume during playback of movies, sound files or voice
4
Q
button
5 3 button
Displays the [W Setting] menu during single-image display (p.65).
Returns to single-image display during Playback Mode Palette display (p.167).
Returns zoom, 6- or 12-image display to single-image display.
62
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 63 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changes to 12-image display of the selected folder during folder display (p.166).
Changes to 12-image display of the selected date during calendar
6
I
button
Zooms up on the subjects’ faces in the order in which they were
recognized during shooting (Face close-up playback) (p.174).
7
Four-way controller
(2)
(3)
(45)
: Plays back and pauses a movie or sound file (p.163,
: Displays the Playback Mode Palette (p.168).
Stops a movie or sound file during playback (p.163,
: Displays the previous or next image and sound file
during single-image display (p.162).
Fast-forwards, fast-reverses, frame forwards, frame reverses, reverses a movie and makes a movie play
forwards during playback (p.163).
Fast forwards, reverses, and moves to the next index in
(2345) : Moves the display area during zoom display (p.173).
Selects an image in 6- or 12-image display, a folder in folder
display, and a date in calendar display (p.164, p.165, p.166).
Moves the image when using the Frame Composite
Adjusts the position of a frame or an image when you are
using the Original Frame function (p.211).
8 4/W button
Changes the information on the display (p.31).
Returns zoom, 6- or 12-image display to single-image display (p.165, p.173).
Changes to 12-image display of the selected folder during folder
Changes to single-image display of the selected date during calendar
9 Green/i button
Switches from single-image display to the Delete screen (p.176).
Switches from 6- or 12-image display to the Select & Delete screen (p.178).
Switches from folder display to the calendar display screen (p.165).
Switches from calendar display to the folder display screen (p.165).
2
63
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 64 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Switching Between A Mode and Q Mode
In this manual, the capture mode, such as for taking still pictures, is referred to as “A mode” (the capture mode). The playback mode, such as for displaying captured images on the monitor, is referred to as “Q mode” (the playback mode). In Q mode, you can perform simple editing operations on the images that are played back.
Follow the procedure below to switch between A mode and Q mode.
To Switch from A Mode to Q Mode
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Q mode.
To Switch from Q Mode to A Mode
1
Press the Q button or the shutter release button halfway.
The camera switches to A mode.
Displaying data stored in the built-in memory
When an SD Memory Card is inserted in the camera, images, movies, and sounds on the SD Memory Card are displayed. If you want to display images, movies, and sounds stored in built-in memory, turn the camera off and remove the SD Memory Card, or follow the procedure below to use the “Built-in memory display” function.
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
• Viewing images stored in built-in memory while the SD Memory Card is inserted (built-in memory display)
When you press and hold down the Q button for more than one second in
A mode, images, movies and sound files stored in the built-in memory are displayed after the message [Displays image/sound from built-in memory] appears.
• In the built-in memory display, you can play back still pictures (including
enlarged display) (p.162, p.173), play back movies (p.163), play back
sounds (p.226), and switch between 6- or 12-image display, folder display,
and calendar display (p.164, p.165).
• In the built-in memory display, you cannot delete data, delete a selection, display the Playback Mode Palette or display the menu. If you want to perform any of these operations on images, movies, or sounds in the builtin memory, do so after removing the SD Memory Card.
64
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 65 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Camera Functions
To change the camera settings, press the 3 button to display the
[A Rec. Mode] menu or [W Setting] menu. Functions for playing back and editing images and sound files are displayed from the Playback
Mode Palette.
2
Operating the Menus
Press the 3 button in A mode to display the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
Press the 3 button in Q mode to display the [W Setting] menu.
Use the four-way controller (45) to switch between [A Rec. Mode] menu and [W Setting] menu.
65
2
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 66 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
During playback
P
During recording
3 8
MENU
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1 / 4
Bright
12
M
AWB
Edit
MENU
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1 / 4
02/02/2010
Standard
English
MENU Exit
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1 / 4
Bright
12
M
AWB
SHUTTER
Press halfway
P
MENU
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1 / 4
02/02/2010
Standard
English
MENU Exit
3 8
The setting is complete and the camera returns to A mode.
Edit
The setting is complete and the camera returns to Q mode.
Available button operations appear on the display during menu operation.
66
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 67 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
e.g.: To set the [Quality Level] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(3).
The frame moves to [Image Tone].
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
12
M
AWB
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller (3) twice.
The frame moves to [Quality Level].
4
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Recordable Image No.
A pull-down menu appears with the items that can be selected.
The pull-down menu displays only those items that can be selected with the current camera settings.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Cancel
Bright
12
M
12
OK OK
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the setting.
The quality level changes each time the four-way controller (23) is pressed.
6
Press the 4 button or the four-way controller (4).
The setting is saved and then the camera is ready for setting other functions.
To exit the settings, press the 3 button.
2
To use another operation, refer to the alternate step 6 options on the next page.
67
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 68 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
To Save the Setting and Start Taking Pictures
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the shutter release button is pressed fully, the picture is taken.
When the [W Setting] menu is displayed from Q mode, you can switch to A mode by pressing the Q button.
To Save the Setting and Start Playback of Images
6
Press the Q button.
When the [A Rec. Mode] menu is displayed from A mode, the setting is saved and the camera returns to playback status.
To Cancel the Changes and Continue with Menu Operations
6
Press the 3 button.
The changes are canceled and the screen returns to step 3.
The 3 button function differs depending on the screen. Refer to the guide indications.
MEN
U
Exit
MEN
U
Exits the menu and returns to the original screen.
Returns to the previous screen with the current setting.
MEN
U
Cancel Cancels the current selection, exits the menu and returns to the previous screen.
68
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 69 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Menu List
This displays the items that can be set with the menus and provides descriptions of each item. See the list of default settings in the Appendix
“Default Settings” (p.295) to decide whether you want the settings saved
when the camera is turned off and whether you want the settings returned to the defaults when the camera is reset.
[A Rec. Mode] Menu
This menu shows the functions related to taking still pictures and recording movies.
Item
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Description
For setting the tone of images
Page
For choosing the number of recorded pixels of still pictures p.125
For setting the quality level of still pictures
White Balance
Focusing
Area
For adjusting the color balance according to the lighting conditions
When = (Standard), q (Macro), or (1cm
Macro) is selected as the focus mode, you can change the autofocus area (Focusing Area)
AF
Setting
Auto Macro For choosing whether or not to use the auto macro function p.122
Focus
Assist
For setting whether or not to use the focus assist light
AE Metering
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
For choosing the area of the screen that is metered to determine the exposure
For setting the sensitivity
For setting the adjustment range when sensitivity is set to AUTO
EV Compensation
Recorded
Pixels
Movie
D-Range
Setting
Movie SR
Interval
Shoot
Highlight
Correction
Shadow
Correction
Pixel Track SR
Interval Shoot
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture
For choosing the number of recorded pixels and the frame rate for movies
For choosing whether or not to use the movie shake reduction function
For recording multiple still pictures taken at a set interval as a movie file
For setting whether to perform bright portion compensation
For setting whether to perform dark portion compensation
For choosing whether to compensate for camera shake while taking still pictures
For setting the interval, number of pictures, and start time for taking pictures
2
69
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 70 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Item
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
Sharpness
Saturation
(Tone Adjustment)
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
Description
For choosing whether to use the Blink Detection function with the Face Detection function
For choosing whether or not to use the digital zoom function
For choosing whether to display Instant Review
For choosing whether to save the set values of the shooting function or return to the defaults when the camera is turned off
For assigning a function to the Green button in A mode
For choosing sharp or soft outlines
For setting the color saturation. When [Monochrome] is selected, the item changes to [Tone Adjustment]
For setting the image contrast level
For choosing whether to imprint the date and/or time when taking still pictures
For setting whether or not to turn on the macro light for macro photography
Page
[A Rec. Mode] Menu 1
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU Exit
1/4
Bright
12
M
AWB
[A Rec. Mode] Menu 2
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
MENU Exit
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
[A Rec. Mode] Menu 3
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU
Exit
3/4
[A Rec. Mode] Menu 4
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
MENU
Exit
4/4
Off
• Use the 9 (Green) mode to enjoy easy picture-taking using standard
settings, regardless of the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.86).
• Assigning frequently used functions to the Green button enables you
to go straight to the desired function (p.139).
70
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 71 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
[W Setting] Menu
Item
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
Language/
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
Pixel Mapping
Format
Description
For adjusting the operation volume and playback volume, and setting the start-up sound, shutter sound, key operation sound, and self-timer sound
For adjusting the date and time
For setting the alarm
For setting the hometown and destination
For setting the text size of the menu
For setting the language in which menus and messages appear
For choosing how names are assigned to folders for storing images and sound files
For setting the method for connecting to a PC (MSC or PTP)
For setting the output format to the AV equipment
For setting the HDMI output format when connecting to an AV device with an HDMI terminal
For setting whether or not to use Eye-Fi communication
For changing the brightness of the display
For setting the time until the camera enters powersaving mode
Page
For setting the time until the camera turns off automatically
For choosing whether to use the Quick Zoom
function (p.173) when playing back images
For setting whether to display explanations for selected items in Capture Mode Palette and
Playback Mode Palette displays
For returning settings other than the date and time, language, world time and video out to their defaults
For deleting all the images and sound files at once
For correcting for defective pixels on the CCD sensor
For formatting the SD Memory Card
2
71
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 72 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
[W Setting] Menu 1
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1/4
01/01/2010
Standard
English
MENU Exit
[W Setting] Menu 3
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Exit
3/4
5 sec.
3 min.
[W Setting] Menu 2
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MENU Exit
2/4
Date
MSC
NTSC
Auto
[W Setting] Menu 4
Setting
Pixel Mapping
Format
4/4
MENU Exit
72
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 73 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures
Taking Still Pictures .................................. 74
Setting the Shooting Functions ............. 117
Taking Pictures Underwater .................. 148
Recording Movies ................................... 150
Saving the Settings (Memory) ............... 158
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 74 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Still Pictures
3
Taking Pictures
The Optio W90 is equipped with functions and shooting modes that support a wide array of scenes and subjects. This section explains shooting using the default settings when shipped.
Power switch
Shutter release button w
/x button
74
1
Press the power switch.
The camera turns on and is ready to take still pictures. In this manual, this is called Still Picture Capture mode.
2
Confirm the subject and shooting information on the display.
The focus frame in the middle of the display indicates the zone of automatic focusing.
38
Focus frame
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
3 8
Face detection frame
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 75 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
You can change the captured area by pressing the zoom button (p.87).
Right (x) Enlarges the subject.
Left (w) Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The camera emits Focus Assist light in dark shooting situations.
The focus frame (or face detection frame) on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
1/250
F4.6
38
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light conditions.
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review: p.77)
and is saved to the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.
Press the Green button to switch to the 9 (Green) mode and let the
camera set all the shooting functions automatically (p.86).
3
75
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 76 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Using the Shutter Release Button
The shutter release button works in a two-step action as follows.
Press halfway
This refers to pressing the shutter release button gently to the first position. This locks the focus setting and the exposure. The green focus frame lights on the display when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the subject is in focus. If the subject is out of focus, the frame turns white.
Press fully
This refers to pressing the shutter release button all the way down to the fully depressed position. This takes a picture.
76
Not pressed Pressed halfway
(first position)
Pressed fully
(second position)
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn where the first position and second position are.
Poor focusing conditions
The camera may not be able to focus under the following conditions. In these cases, lock the focus on an object the same distance away as the subject (by pressing and holding the shutter release button halfway), then aim the camera at your subject and press the shutter release button fully.
• Objects that lack contrast such as a blue sky or white wall
• Dark places or objects, or conditions that prevent light being reflected back
• Horizontal lines or intricate patterns
• Fast moving objects
• When there is an object in the foreground and an object in the background in the captured area
• Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright background)
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 77 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Instant Review and Blink Detection
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review) immediately after it is captured. If the camera detects that the subject’s
eyes are closed while Face Detection (p.81) is activated, the message
[Closed eyes have been detected] appears for 3 seconds (Blink
Detection).
• When the Face Detection function does not work, Blink Detection also does not function. Even if the subject’s faces are recognized, Blink
Detection may not function depending on the condition of the recognized faces.
• You can also disable the Blink Detection function (p.138).
3
77
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 78 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Shooting Mode
The Optio W90 has a variety of shooting modes that let you take pictures or record movies and sound in different situations simply by choosing the right mode for the particular situation from the Capture Mode Palette.
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose a
shooting mode.
Landscape
A guide of the selected shooting mode is displayed in the lower part of the display.
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
F o r c a p t u r i n g l a n d s c a p e v i e w s . E n h a n c e s c o l o r s o f s k y a n d f o l i a g e
MENU Cancel
1 / 2
OK OK
38
78
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 79 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
The following 24 modes can be selected with Capture Mode Palette.
Item b
Auto Picture
R
Program
A Night Scene
Description
Automatically selects the best capture mode
Used for basic shooting. Various functions can also be set with this mode
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For recording movies
For capturing images underwater
C
Movie
Underwater q
Underwater Movie Use this mode for taking underwater movies
Landscape
For capturing landscape views. Enhances colors of sky and foliage
I
P
Flower
Portrait
For images of flowers. The outline of the flower is softened
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone
X c
Digital SR
Q Surf & Snow
R
C
\
S
U
B
B
D
F
Digital Microscope Captures larger images of the small objects
Digital Wide
Kids
Pet
Sport
Fireworks
Candlelight
Night Scene
Portrait
Text
Food
Digital Panorama
Stitches two pictures together to create a wider image
Higher sensitivity reduces blur
For bright images such as sand or snow.
Accurately meters for bright scenes
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone
Automatically detects and captures a pet’s full face
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until the picture is taken
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For capturing scenes in candlelight
For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or other support is advised
Captures text in an easy to read manner. Text contrast can be adjusted
For images of food and prepared dishes.
Enhances saturation and contrast
Stitches images taken with the camera to create a panoramic photograph
Page
⎯
⎯
⎯
3
79
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 80 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
N
Item
Frame Composite
Description
For capturing images with a frame. Recorded pixels is fixed to 3M
Page
Report
For capturing image with fixed 1280×960 pixels for reports
⎯
* Green Mode (p.86) and Voice Recording (p.224) are available in addition to the
ones noted above.
• In shooting modes other than R (Program), A (Night Scene),
C
(Movie), Microscope),
Panorama), X (Digital Wide), and N (Frame Composite), saturation, contrast, sharpness, white balance, etc. are automatically set to the optimal settings for the selected mode.
• Some functions may not be available or may not function fully depending on the selected shooting mode. For details, refer to
“Functions Available for Each Shooting Mode” (p.288).
• You can turn off the shooting mode guide on the Capture Mode Palette
80
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 81 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the Face Detection Function
When the camera detects a person’s face in the image, the Face Detection function displays a yellow face detection frame around the face on the display screen, sets the focus
(Face Detection AF) and compensates the exposure (Face Detection AE).
If the subject in the face detection frame moves, the frame also moves and changes size as it tracks the face.
The Face Detection function can recognize up to 32 people’s faces. If it recognizes multiple faces, the camera displays a yellow frame over the main face and white frames over the other faces. It can display up to a total of 31 frames, including both the main and white frames.
38
Face detection frame
When the multiple faces are detected
38
Main frame White frame
• Face Detection AF and AE may not work if the subject is wearing sunglasses, has part of their face covered or is not looking toward the camera.
• If the camera cannot detect the subject’s face, the camera focuses using the setting currently selected in [Focusing Area].
• However, the Smile Capture function may not work and an image may not be captured, even when turned on, depending on the condition of the recognized faces, such as the faces being too small. If this happens, press the shutter release button to take a picture.
• In C (Pet) mode, the Face Detection mode is switched to pet detection and the camera detects a registered pet’s face.
3
To Switch the Face Detection Function
By default, the Face Detection function is set to Face Detection On. You can switch to the Smile Capture function, which automatically releases the shutter when your subject smiles. The Face Detection function is switched as follows each time the I button is pressed:
Smile Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On
81
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 82 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
I
button
3
An icon indicating either Face Detection or Smile Capture appears on the display. (The Face Detection Off icon only appears right after the
Face Detection function is switched to off.)
Face Detection On Smile Capture Face Detection Off
P P P
• The Face Detection function cannot be set to off in b (Auto Picture),
B (Night Scene Portrait), P (Portrait), or R (Kids). You can select either Face Detection On or Smile Capture in these modes.
• When Face Detection Off is selected, selecting 9 (Green), b (Auto
Picture), B (Night Scene Portrait), C (Movie), P (Portrait), or
R
(Kids) modes automatically switches to Face Detection On. When switching to another mode from one of these modes, the Face
Detection setting returns to the previous setting.
• If you use the Face Detection function when the flash mode is set to
, (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d (Flash On +
Red-eye).
82
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 83 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Pictures Automatically (Auto Picture Mode)
In b (Auto Picture) mode, the camera automatically selects the most appropriate mode depending on the situations and subjects.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select b
(Auto Picture).
3
Press the 4 button.
Auto Picture mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The automatically selected capture mode appears on the top left of the display.
Portrait
Landscape
Night Scene
Flower
Sport
Night Scene Portrait
Candlelight
Others*
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
* This mode is selected when the suitable shooting mode is not determined.
3
83
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 84 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
The following restrictions apply in b mode:
• EV Compensation is unavailable.
• You cannot turn the Face Detection function off.
• The [Focusing Area] setting is fixed at J (Multiple).
• Flower cannot be selected when using Digital Zoom or Intelligent
Zoom.
• If Night Scene is selected when the flash mode is , (Auto) or c (Auto
+ Red-eye), the flash mode automatically changes to a (Flash Off).
• If the (Night Scene Portrait) mode is selected when the flash mode is , (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d (Flash On +
Red-eye) when the camera detects a face and determines that the flash is needed.
84
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 85 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Functions (Program Mode)
In R (Program) mode, the shutter speed and the aperture are set automatically by the camera during shooting. However, you can select other functions such as the flash mode and recorded pixels.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
3
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select R
(Program).
3
Press the 4 button.
Program mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
4
Set the functions you want to use.
P
Refer to “Setting the Shooting Functions” (p.117 - p.146) for details of
how to set the functions.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
85
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 86 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures in the Basic Mode (Green Mode)
In the 9 (Green) mode, you can enjoy easy picture-taking using standard settings, regardless of the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
9 mode settings are as shown below.
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
, (Auto)
9
(Standard)
Focus Mode = (Standard)
Information Display Standard
P (Off) Pixel Track SR
Recorded Pixels
White Balance
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
E (4000×3000)
F
(Auto)
J
(Multiple)
O
(On)
O
(On)
AE Metering
Image Tone
L (Multi-segment metering)
Bright
Quality Level D (Better)
Highlight Correction P (Off)
Shadow Correction P (Off)
Sensitivity AUTO (80-800)
EV Compensation ±0.0
Blink Detection
O
(On)
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
O
O
(On)
(On)
Sharpness
Saturation
G
(Normal)
G
(Normal)
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
G
(Normal)
Off
P (Off)
Shutter release button
86
Green Button
1
Press the Green button in A
mode.
The camera switches to 9 mode.
Press the Green button again to
return to the status before 9 mode
was selected.
38
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 87 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• Assign 9 mode to the [Green Button] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu for using 9 mode (p.140). (The default setting is 9 mode).
• In 9 mode, you cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4/W button.
• Press the 3 button in 9 mode to display the [W Setting] menu.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu cannot be displayed.
• When the camera is turned off in 9 mode, it turns on in 9 mode next time the power switch is pressed.
3
Using the Zoom
You can use the zoom to change the captured area.
w
/x button
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the w/x button in A
mode.
Zoom ratio
Zoom bar w Wide (left)
Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
x
Tele (right)
Enlarges the subject.
If you continue to press x, the camera
3 8
automatically switches from Optical
Zoom to Intelligent Zoom and stops at the point where the zoom switches to Digital Zoom.
87
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 88 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Once the button is released and pressed again, the camera switches to digital zoom.
If the Digital Zoom is set to off on the menu, the Optical Zoom and the
Intelligent Zoom ranges are available for use. The zoom ratio of the intelligent zoom changes depending on the number of recorded pixels.
The zoom bar is displayed as follows.
Zoom in with high image quality.
Zoom in with some degree of image deterioration.
3
Optical zoom range*1 Intelligent
Zoom range*2
Digital Zoom range
*1 You can zoom in to a maximum of 5× optically.
*2 The Intelligent Zoom range differs depending on the recorded pixels. See the following table.
Recorded pixels and the maximum zoom ratio
Recorded
Pixels
E
/U
6/V f/W h
L
V l m
Intelligent Zoom
(The zoom ratio includes the 5× optical zoom.)
Not Available (5× optical zoom only)
Approx. 6.5×
Approx. 7.7×
Approx. 9.8×
Approx. 10.4×
Not Available (5× optical zoom only)
Approx. 19.5×
Approx. 31.3× (same as Digital Zoom)
Digital Zoom
Equivalent to approx.
31.3×
Equivalent to approx.
31.3×
88
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 89 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake when taking pictures at high zoom.
• Pictures taken in the digital zoom range appear grainier than pictures taken in the optical zoom range.
• Intelligent Zoom is not available under the following conditions:
When the number of recorded pixels is set to E and U (5× optical zoom available).
In 9 (Green), C (Movie), and (Underwater movie) mode
When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.
• Intelligent Zoom and Digital Zoom are not available in C (Pet), c (Digital SR), and
(Report) and c (Burst Shooting) modes.
• The image enlarged using Intelligent Zoom may appear rough on the display. This does not affect the quality of the recorded image.
• Intelligent Zoom is available regardless of whether Digital Zoom is turned on or off.
• Digital Zoom is not available in (Digital Microscope) mode.
• Not every zooming function is available in X (Digital Wide) mode.
3
To Set the Digital Zoom
The digital zoom is set to O (On) in the default settings. To take pictures using only the optical zoom and Intelligent Zoom, set the digital zoom to
P
(Off).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Digital Zoom].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between O
(On) or P (Off).
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
3/4
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
O (On) Uses Digital Zoom
Memory
Green Button
P
(Off) Uses only optical zoom and Intelligent Zoom
The setting is saved.
MENU Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Saving the Digital Zoom Function setting 1p.158
89
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 90 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes (Night Scene,
Night Scene Portrait, Digital SR, Fireworks, and
Candlelight Modes)
You can choose settings appropriate for taking pictures of dark scenes, such as nightscapes.
A Night Scene
B
Night Scene Portrait c
S
U
Digital SR
Fireworks
Candlelight
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or other support is advised
Higher sensitivity reduces blur
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested
For capturing scenes in candlelight
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
90
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select A
(Night Scene), B (Night Scene Portrait), c (Digital
SR), S (Fireworks), or U (Candlelight).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera recognizes a person’s face, the Face Detection
function is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.81).
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 91 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• The shutter speed tends to be slower when taking pictures of dark scenes.
• To prevent the camera from shaking, set the Pixel Track SR (p.135) or
use a tripod and/or the self-timer function (p.103).
• In c (Digital SR) mode, the sensitivity is automatically set to AUTO, the [ISO Corction in AUTO] is set to 80-6400, and the number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/W (2592×1464).
• For S (Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at the minimum, the focus mode is s (Infinity), and the flash mode is a (Flash Off). Also, the shutter speed is set to 4 seconds and the aperture is fixed to open.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are not available in c (Digital SR) mode.
3
Taking Pictures of People (Portrait Mode)
P
(Portrait) mode is suitable for taking pictures of people. It reproduces
a healthy and bright skin tone. The Face Detection function (p.81)
operates for the shooting mode, making it easier to emphasize the subject’s face when taking pictures.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
P
(Portrait).
91
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 92 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
92
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 93 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Pictures of Children (Kids Mode)
R
(Kids) mode is suitable for taking pictures of moving children. It also
reproduces healthy and bright skin tone. Face Detection function (p.81)
operates automatically in R mode, making it easier to emphasize the subject’s face when taking pictures.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select R
(Kids).
3
Press the 4 button.
Kids mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
38
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
3
93
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 94 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Pictures of Your Pet (Pet Mode)
In C (Pet) mode, the camera automatically releases the shutter when a registered pet is detected. You can capture the color of your pet’s coat.
3
Shutter release button
3 button
I
button
Four-way controller
4 button
Green button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
C
(Pet).
94
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 95 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the 4 button.
The pet registration screen appears.
Aiming the camera at a pet’s full face automatically releases the shutter and the pet registration confirmation screen appears. When you select
[Registry] using four-way controller
(2) and press the 4 button, the picture of the registered pet is indicated on the upper-left corner of the display and the camera returns to the capture status.
When the camera detects the pet’s face, the camera automatically releases the shutter.
You can also take a picture by pressing the shutter release button.
Pet registration screen
Registry
Cancel
Registry confirmation screen
When you press the I button twice in the capture status screen, the pet registration screen appears to register another pet. You can register up to three pets.
38
Capture status screen
• When you press the 3 button on the pet registration screen, the registration will be canceled and the camera returns to the still picture capture mode. However, the camera will not release the shutter automatically when it detects a pet’s face if no pets are registered.
• Only dogs and cats can be registered using the Pet Detection function.
Other animals or human faces cannot be registered. You may not be able to register a pet’s face if, for example, the pet’s face is too small.
• The camera may not detect the registered pet’s face, depending on the shooting situation.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are not available in C (Pet) mode.
• You cannot turn off the LCD or change the display to “Simple Display
+ Subscreen” by pressing the 4/W button in C (Pet) mode.
3
95
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 96 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
To Switch the Pet You Want to Shoot
If you have registered two or three pets, choose the pet you want to detect.
1
Press the I button on the
capture status screen in
C
(Pet) mode.
The pet registration screen appears.
Selecting pet to shoot
Cancel
Delete
OK OK
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the pet you
want to detect.
3
Press the 4 button.
The selected pet is switched to the pet you want to detect and the camera returns to capture status.
To Delete the Pet from the Entry
1
Press the I button on the
capture status screen in
C
(Pet) mode.
The pet registration screen appears.
Selecting pet to shoot
Cancel
Delete
OK OK
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the pet you
want to delete.
3
Press the Green button.
4
Use the four-way controller (2) to select [Delete].
5
Press the 4 button.
The selected pet is deleted.
96
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 97 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• [Focusing Area] is set to W (Automatic Tracking AF) and the flash mode is set to a (Flash Off). However, you can change these settings.
• [Focus Assist] is set to off. However, you can change this setting.
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities
(Surf & Snow/Sport Mode)
Q
Surf & Snow
\ Sport
For bright images such as sand or snow. Accurately meters for bright scenes
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until the picture is taken
3
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select Q (Surf
& Snow) or \ (Sport).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function
is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.81).
97
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 98 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
When the Sport mode is selected, the focus frame follows the subject while
38
the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Taking Pictures of Text (Text Mode)
Take crisp and easy-to-read pictures of text. It is useful for taking pictures of and saving important documents, and when the text is too small and difficult to read.
Color
Reversed
Color
B&W
Negative
A picture of the text is taken in its original color.
The colors are reversed.
A picture of the text is taken in black and white.
Black and white are reversed.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select (Text).
98
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 99 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the 4 button.
The text mode selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select , , , or .
5
Press the 4 button.
The selected icon appears and the camera returns to capture status.
3
38
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Taking Pictures in Digital Microscope Mode
In the Digital Microscope mode, you can take pictures of objects as close as 1 cm, also because the 3 macro lights around the lens are always lighted, you can take minute pictures of text, the veins of leaves, or specimens of tiny insects etc.
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at L (1920×1080).
• The focus mode is fixed at (1cm Macro).
• j (Continuous Shooting) /c (Burst Shooting)/l (Auto Bracket) cannot be selected.
• The flash does not discharge in this mode.
• The Face Detection function and the blink detection function are turned off.
• You can change the information display only between the normal and
No Info displays.
• The illumination of the macro lights may be uneven or insufficient depending on the shooting conditions.
99
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 100 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Press four-way controller (3) in A mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
(Digital Microscope).
3
Press the 4 button.
(Digital Microscope) mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
3
4
Press the w/x button.
If you press x, the camera enlarges the subject.
w Wide (left)
Widens the area that is captured by the camera.
x
Tele (right)
Enlarges the subject.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green at the position where the camera focuses on the subject.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
100
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 101 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Framing Your Pictures (Frame Composite Mode)
In N (Frame Composite) mode, you can take pictures using the frames stored in the camera.
Shutter release button f /y button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select N
(Frame Composite).
3
Press the 4 button.
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the frame
you want to use.
3
5
Press the y button.
The selected frame appears in single-image display.
You can choose another frame using either of the following operations.
Four-way controller (45) Press to choose a different frame.
Zoom button (f) Press to return to the 12-frame display of the frame selection screen, and then perform step 4 to choose a different frame.
101
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 102 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
6
Press the 4 button.
The frame appears on the display.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
3 8
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
8
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at h (2048×1536)/L
(1920×1080).
• You cannot turn off the LCD or change the display to “Simple Display
+ Subscreen” by pressing the 4/W button in N (Frame composite) mode.
• At shipment, the camera includes 3 default frames and 42 optional frames for each aspect ratio (4:3 and 16:9). (The CD-ROM supplied with the camera contains a total of 90 frames, including the default frames.)
Optional Frames
The optional frames are stored in the built-in memory in the Optio W90. These optional frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a computer or the built-in memory is formatted. To reload the optional frames into the built-in memory, copy the files from the CD-ROM (S-SW102) supplied with
Adding a Frame to a captured image 1p.206
102
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 103 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the Self-timer
In Self-timer mode, the picture is taken ten seconds or two seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
Stabilize the camera with a tripod or other support when taking a picture with the self-timer.
g
Z
Use this mode when you want to be included in a group picture. The picture is taken approximately ten seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
Use this mode to avoid camera shake. The picture is taken approximately two seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.
3
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g and press
the four-way controller (3).
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or Z and
press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take the picture using the self-timer.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is
activated and the face detection frame appears (p.81).
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
103
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 104 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken ten seconds or two seconds later.
Focusing may be compromised if you move the camera while the selftimer lamp is blinking when taking still pictures.
• In C (Movie) mode, recording will start after ten seconds (or two seconds).
• Press the shutter release button halfway while the self-timer is engaged to stop the countdown and press fully to restart the countdown.
• Z cannot be selected while 9 (Green) mode is in default setting. Select
Z in another shooting mode and then switch the shooting mode to 9.
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in C (Pet) mode.
Taking a Series of Pictures (Continuous
Shooting/Burst Shooting)
Pictures are taken continuously as long as the shutter release button is pressed.
j c
Continuous
Shooting
Burst
Shooting
Each time a picture is taken, the image is saved in the memory before the next image is taken. The higher the image quality, the longer the interval between shots.
The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/
W
(2592×1464) and the interval between shots is shorter than “Continuous Shooting”.
* The number of images that can be shot continuously and the interval between shots depend on shooting situations.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
104
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 105 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select j or c and
press the 4 button.
The camera is ready for continuous shooting and burst shooting.
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously as long as you keep the shutter release button pressed.
• The flash does not discharge in j and c modes.
• j and c cannot be selected in 9 (Green), b (Auto Picture),
(Digital Microscope), A (Night Scene), C (Movie),
(Underwater Movie), S (Fireworks), N (Frame Composite),
X
(Digital Wide) or F (Digital Panorama) modes.
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are unavailable when the sensitivity is set to 3200 and higher.
• With j, you can continue shooting until the memory capacity of the
SD Memory Card or built-in memory is full.
• The interval of j varies according to the [Recorded Pixels] and
[Quality Level] settings.
• The focus, exposure and white balance are locked with the first shot.
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.81), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• The Blink Detection function works only for the last shot.
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f/W in j and c modes. When the shooting mode is set to (Report), the number of recorded pixels is set to
V (1280×960).
3
105
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 106 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures Using the Remote Control Unit
(Optional)
You can use the remote control (optional) to take pictures while you are away from the camera.
i h
3-sec Remote
Control
0-sec Remote
Control
The shutter will be released after about three seconds when the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
The shutter will be released immediately when the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select i and press
the four-way controller (3).
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select i or h and
press the 4 button.
The self-timer lamp begins to blink slowly and be ready to take a picture by the remote control.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection
106
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 107 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Point the remote control at the remote control receiver and press the shutter release button on the remote control.
The focus frame turns green when the subject is in focus and the camera takes a picture at the following timing.
When i (3-sec Remote Control) is selected:
The self-timer lamp blinks quickly and the camera takes a picture after about three seconds.
When h (0-sec Remote Control) is selected:
The camera takes a picture immediately.
• The operating range is approx. 4 m (13 ft) from the front of the camera when using the remote control unit.
• In C (Movie) mode, pressing the shutter release button again stops the recording.
• The camera takes a picture even if the focus is not achieved.
• If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during the countdown, the countdown stops. If the shutter release button is pressed fully, the camera starts the countdown again.
• i/hcannot be selected in 9 (Green) mode.
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in C (Pet) mode.
• The battery in the remote control provides about 30,000 operations.
Contact your nearest PENTAX service center about replacing the battery. (A charge will be made.)
3
107
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 108 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot)
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a set interval from a set time.
Interval
Number of Shots
10 sec. – 99 min.
2 shots – number of recordable images
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals. The intervals can be set in increments of one second from ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in 1 minute increments from 4 to 99 minutes. You cannot set the camera to take interval shots at less than ten seconds.
You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it cannot exceed the number of recordable images.
You can set 1 minute increments for the first 59 minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select k (Interval
Shoot) and press the 4 button.
The current interval shoot settings appear for approximately 1 minute. To take pictures with the current settings, go to step 10.
3
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
Interval Shoot
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
Interval
0 min.
10 sec.
2 Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the minutes, then press the
four-way controller (5).
Number of Shots
Start Delay 0 hr.
2
0 min.
3 Use the four-way controller (23)
MENU
to set the seconds, then press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Interval].
5
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].
108
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 109 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Set the number of shots.
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set [Number of Shots],
then press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Number of Shots].
7
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press
the four-way controller (5).
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press
the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button.
The [Interval Shoot] settings are saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
10
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
11
Press the shutter release button fully.
Interval shooting starts.
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power switch during standby to display the remaining number of shots and interval on the monitor.
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval shooting.
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),
F (Digital Panorama), X (Digital Wide), S (Fireworks) and
O
(Voice Recording) modes.
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring during interval shooting.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the [A Rec.
3
109
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 110 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure
Adjustment (Auto Bracket)
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the exposure and take three pictures in succession. After taking the pictures, you can select the best one.
The shooting order is best exposure → –1.0 EV → +1.0 EV.
Shutter release button
110
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a (Auto
Bracket) and press the 4
button.
The camera is now ready to take pictures with Auto Bracket.
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the exposure and take the three pictures at different exposures.
• When the Instant Review is set to on (p.139), the pictures taken are
shown in Instant Review after shooting (p.77).
• Auto Bracket is unavailable in C (Movie), (Underwater Movie), b (Auto Picture), (Digital Microscope), 9 (Green),
S
(Fireworks), F (Digital Panorama), X (Digital Wide),
N
(Frame Composite) and O (Voice Recording) modes.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 111 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the Digital Wide Function (Digital Wide
Mode)
In X (Digital Wide) mode, you can stitch two vertical images captured with this camera into a single frame up to approx. 21 mm coverage (35 mm film equivalent).
+
3
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select X
(Digital Wide).
111
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 112 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera enters the X mode.
Turn the camera 90° clockwise and align your first picture.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and
the face detection frame appears (p.81).
1
3 8
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The first captured image is temporarily saved, and the shooting screen for the second image is displayed.
22
OK Exit
6
Take the second image.
Overlap the image on the preview guide on the left of the screen to compose the second image. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to take the second image. This combines first and second images.
The stitched first and second image appears on the display temporarily
(Instant Review), and then is saved.
112
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 113 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• To minimize distortion when taking the second image, turn the camera so that it pivots around the right edge of the preview guide on the screen.
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second image on the preview guide.
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.81), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured with X mode is fixed at f (2592×1944).
• (1cm Macro) is unavailable in X mode.
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4/W button in X (Digital Wide) mode.
3
To Cancel after Taking the First Shot
1
When the shooting screen for the second image is
displayed in step 5 on p.112, press the 4 button or the
four-way controller (3).
A confirmation dialog appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an option and
press the 4 button.
Save
Discard
Cancel
Save Saves the first image and you can retake the first shot. The first image is saved at h (2048×1536).
Discard
Cancel
Discards the first image and you can retake the first shot.
Returns to the shooting screen for the second image.
113
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 114 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Panoramic Pictures (Digital Panorama
Mode)
In F (Digital Panorama) mode, you can stitch together two or three captured frames to create a panoramic photograph with the camera.
Shutter release button
3
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select F
(Digital Panorama).
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera enters the F mode and the message [Set shift direction] is displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the direction
in which the images will be joined.
The screen for taking the first frame is displayed.
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection frame
1
38
Four-way controller
4 button
114
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 115 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The screen for taking the second frame is displayed after you take the first frame.
If you select right (5) in step 4:
The right edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on the left edge of the display.
If you select left (4) in step 4:
The left edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on the right edge of the display.
7
Take the second frame.
Move the camera so that the semitransparent image and the actual view overlap and press the shutter release button.
1 2
3
8
Take the third frame.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to take the third frame.
The panorama images are joined and a stitched together image appears.
The stitched together image does not appear when [Instant Review]
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second frames or the second and third frames on the preview guide.
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.81), it works only
when taking the first shot.
• You cannot turn off the LCD or change the display to “Simple Display
+ Subscreen” by pressing the 4/W button in F (Digital
Panorama) mode.
115
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 116 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
To Cancel after Taking the First or Second Frame
1
After shooting the first frame in step 6 on p.115 or the
second frame in step 7, press the 4 button or the
four-way controller (3).
A confirmation dialog appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an option and
press the 4 button.
Save
Save the image(s) and exit this screen?
Save
Discard
Cancel
Saves the captured image(s) and you can retake the first frame.
When this option is selected after shooting the second frame, the first and the second frames are stitched together and saved as a panoramic photograph.
Discard Discards the captured image(s) and you can retake the first frame.
Cancel Returns to the previous shooting screen.
Unstitched images shot in F mode are fixed at i (1600×1200).
116
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 117 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Shooting Functions
Selecting the Flash Mode
, a b
Auto
Flash Off
Flash On c
Auto + Red-eye d b
Flash On +
Red-eye
Soft Flash
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light conditions.
The flash does not discharge, regardless of the brightness.
Use this mode to take pictures where flash photography is prohibited.
The flash discharges regardless of the brightness.
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.
The flash discharges automatically.
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.
The flash discharges regardless of the light conditions.
This mode reduces the intensity of the flash so that the flash is not too bright even when fired at close range. The flash discharges regardless of the light conditions.
3
• The flash mode is fixed at a in the following situations:
- When C (Movie), (Underwater Movie), (Digital Microscope), or S (Fireworks) is selected as the capture mode.
- When j (Continuous Shooting), c (Burst Shooting), or l (Auto
Bracket) is selected as the Drive Mode.
- When s (Infinity) is selected as the focus mode.
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select , or a.
• In A (Night Scene) mode, you cannot select , and c.
• If you use the Face Detection function when , is selected, the mode is automatically set to d.
• A pre-flash discharges when using the red-eye reduction function.
Using the flash when capturing images at a close distance may cause irregularities in the image due to the light distribution.
117
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 118 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Four-way controller
4 button
3
1
Press the four-way controller
(4) in A mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash mode changes each time the button is pressed. You can also change the setting using the four-way controller (23).
Flash Mode
Auto
2
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
About the red-eye phenomenon
Taking pictures using the flash may cause the subject’s eyes to appear red in the resulting picture. This phenomenon occurs when the light from the flash is reflected in the subject’s eyes. It can be reduced by illuminating the area around the subject or moving closer to the subject and zooming out to a wider angle.
Setting the flash mode to c (Auto + Red-eye) or d (Flash On + Red-eye) is also an effective way of reducing red eyes.
If the subject’s eyes appear red despite such precautions, they can be corrected
by the red-eye compensation function (p.205).
Saving the Flash Mode setting 1p.158
118
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 119 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Selecting the Focus Mode
= q
3 s
Standard
Macro
1cm Macro
Pan Focus
Infinity
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 50 cm to
∞. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 10 cm to 60 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 1 cm to 30 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
This mode is used when you ask someone to take pictures for you, or when taking pictures of the scenery through the window of a car or train. The entire picture, from the front to the back, is focused.
This mode is used for taking distant objects. The flash is set to a (Flash Off).
\
Manual Focus This mode lets you adjust the focus manually.
3
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller
(5) in A mode.
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.
The focus mode changes each time the button is pressed. You can also change the setting using the four-way controller (23).
2
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
119
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 120 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select =, q, or 3.
• (1cm Macro) is unavailable in X (Digital Wide) mode.
• The focus mode is fixed at s in S (Fireworks) mode.
• The noise from focusing is recorded when a focus mode other than 3 or s is selected in C (Movie) and (Underwater Movie) modes.
• When [Auto Macro] is on and shooting with q selected, if the subject is further than 60 cm away, the camera automatically focuses to
∞
(Infinity).
Saving the Focus Mode setting 1p.158
3
To Set the Manual Focus
The procedure for setting the focus manually (\) is described below.
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in A mode.
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (5) to select \.
3
Press the 4 button.
The central portion of the image is magnified to full screen on the display.
120
4
Press the four-way controller
(23).
The \ indicator appears on the display to indicate the approximate distance to the subject. Use the fourway controller (23) to adjust the focus using the indicator as a guide.
2
for distant focus
3
for closer focus
2m
1
0.5
\
indicator
5
Press the 4 button.
The focus is fixed and the camera returns to capture mode.
After the focus is fixed, you can press the four-way controller (5) again to display the \ indicator and readjust the focus.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 121 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
The shooting mode and drive mode cannot be changed while the \ indicator is displayed.
To switch from \ to another focus mode, press the four-way controller
(5) while the \ indicator is displayed.
Changing the Focusing Area (= area)
You can change the autofocus area (Focusing Area).
J
Multiple
K
Spot
W
Automatic Tracking AF
Normal autofocus area
The autofocus area becomes smaller.
Keeps moving subjects in focus.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Focusing
Area].
5
Press the four-way controller
(5).
A pull-down menu appears.
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
3
MENU
Cancel
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the
Focusing Area.
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
OK
OK
121
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 122 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• In C (Movie), (Underwater Movie), and N (Frame Composite) modes, W cannot be selected.
• In S (Fireworks), 9 (Green) and b (Auto Picture) modes, the focusing area is fixed at J.
3
Setting the Auto Macro
When [Auto Macro] is on, the focus is adjusted to the macro range
(distance to the subject is 10 cm to 60 cm) as necessary, even if the focus mode setting is AF (Standard).
When it is off and the focus mode is set to Standard (=), the AF operates only in the standard range, and focusing is not done in the macro range.
When the focus mode is set to Macro or 1cm Macro, the focus is only adjusted in the respective macro range and is not done in the standard range.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Auto Macro].
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
122
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select [O (On)/P (Off)].
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 123 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the = Assist Light (Focus Assist)
The camera automatically emits the Focus assist light in dark shooting situations. You can set the light to on or off.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Focus
Assist].
AF Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
3
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select [O (On)/P (Off)].
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Looking at the light directly will not create a safety hazard. However, do not look into the emitter from a very short distance since you may feel dazzled.
The camera does not emit the Focus Assist light under the following conditions.
• In C (Movie), (Underwater Movie) or S (Fireworks) mode
• When the focus mode is set to 3 (Pan Focus), s (Infinity) or z
(Manual Focus).
123
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 124 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Setting the Image Tone
For setting the tone of images.
You can select from [Bright], [Natural], or [Monochrome].
The default setting is [Bright].
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Image
Tone].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a finishing
tone.
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
Natural
Monochrome
AWB
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• When [Monochrome] is selected, [Tone Adjustment] appears on the
[A Rec. Mode] menu for setting the tone of monochrome images instead of [Saturation].
• Select [Monochrome] in (Report) mode to fix the Tone Adjustment setting to [Standard].
124
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 125 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels
You can choose recorded pixels settings for still pictures.
The larger the number of recorded pixels, the clearer the details will appear when you print your picture. As the quality of the printed picture also depends on the image quality, exposure control, resolution of the printer, and other factors, you do not need to select more than the required number of recorded pixels. h is adequate for making postcard-size prints. The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file size.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate settings according to expected usage.
Recorded Pixels Expected Usage
E
4000×3000
U
4000×2256
6
3072×2304
V
3072×1728
For printing high quality photos or A4-size pictures or larger, or editing images on a computer.
f
2592×1944
W
2592×1464 h
2048×1536
L
1920×1080
For making postcard-size prints.
V
1280×960 l
1024×768 m
640×480
For posting on a website or attaching to e-mail.
• The default setting is E.
•
V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when
(Report) mode is set.
V does not appear in the Recorded Pixels menu.
If you select U/V/W/
L
, the aspect ratio of the screen is 16:9. The monitor display for recording and playback is as shown on the right.
P
3
125
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 126 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recorded
Pixels].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the number
of recorded pixels.
Recordable Image No.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
12
M
9
M
7
M
5.3
M
5
M
3.8
M
12
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in 9 (Green) mode is fixed at E.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in N (Frame
Composite) is fixed at h/L.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in X (Digital
Wide) mode is fixed at f. (The number of recorded pixels will be h if you exit Digital Wide mode without taking the second picture.)
• The number of recorded pixels for images shot in (Report) mode is set to
V (1280×960).
• If you take and save only the first frame in F (Digital Panorama) mode, the number of recorded pixels is fixed at i.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in c (Digital SR) mode is fixed at f/W.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in (Digital
Microscope) mode is fixed at L.
126
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 127 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Selecting the Quality Level of Still Pictures
Select the quality (data compression ratio) for still images according to how the images will be used.
The more stars (E), the higher the quality of the image, but the file size increases. The selected Recorded Pixels setting also affects the size of
Quality Level
C
Best
D
Better
E
Good
Lowest compression ratio. Suitable for photo prints.
Standard compression ratio. Suitable for viewing the image on a computer screen. (default setting)
Highest compression ratio. Suitable for attaching to e-mails or creating websites.
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality
Level].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the quality
level.
The maximum number of pictures you can take is displayed at the top of the screen when you select a quality level.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready for taking pictures.
Recordable Image No.
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
MENU
Cancel
Bright
12
M
12
OK
OK
In 9 (Green) mode, the quality level is fixed at D (Better).
127
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 128 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Adjusting the White Balance
You can take pictures in natural colors by adjusting the white balance according to the light conditions at the time of shooting.
F
Auto
G
Daylight
H
Shade
I
Tungsten Light
J
K
Fluores. Light
Manual
The camera adjusts the white balance automatically.
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in sunlight.
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in the shade.
Use this mode when taking pictures under electric or other tungsten light.
Use this mode when taking pictures under fluorescent light.
Use this mode when adjusting the white balance manually.
• Set another white balance if you are not satisfied with the color balance of pictures taken with the white balance set to F.
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the white balance setting
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [White
Balance].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [White Balance] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the setting.
You can check the results of available white balance settings on the preview image each time you press the fourway controller.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
White Balance
128
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 129 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Refer to the following “Manual Setting” for instructions on adjusting the white balance manually.
If you change the [White Balance] setting frequently, you can save time
by assigning the Fn settings to the Green button (p.139).
Saving the White Balance setting 1p.158
Manual Setting
Have a blank sheet of white paper or similar material ready.
1
In the [White Balance] screen, use the four-way
controller (23) to select K (Manual).
2
Point the camera at the blank sheet of paper or other material so that it fills the frame displayed in the center of the screen.
White Balance
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The white balance is automatically adjusted.
4
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the screen returns to the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
5
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
3
129
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 130 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Setting the AE Metering
You can set the area of the screen where the brightness is metered to determine the exposure.
L
M
N
Multi-segment metering
Centerweighted metering
Spot AE metering
The camera divides the image into 256 areas, meters the brightness and determines the exposure.
The camera takes a reading of the overall brightness of the picture with the center of the image having more influence on the exposure.
The camera determines the exposure by metering the brightness only at the center of the image.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AE Metering].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a metering
method.
Rec. Mode
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF Setting
AE Metering
1/4
Bright
12
M
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the brightness is metered and the exposure is determined.
• When the subject is outside the focusing area and you want to use
Spot AE metering, aim the camera at the subject and press and hold the shutter release button halfway to lock the exposure, then compose your picture again and press the shutter release button fully.
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the [AE Metering] setting
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting
Saving the AE Metering setting 1p.158
130
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 131 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Sensitivity
You can select the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity is automatically adjusted by the camera.
(Default value: sensitivity 80-800)
AUTO
80
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
The lower the sensitivity, the less noise that affects the image. The shutter speed will be slower in low light conditions.
Higher sensitivity settings use faster shutter speeds in low light conditions to reduce camera shake, but the image may be affected by noise.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sensitivity].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the
sensitivity.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
80
100
200
400
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
3
131
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 132 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400, the number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/W (2592×1464).
• When set to c (Digital SR), 9 (Green), C (Movie), or
(Underwater Movie) mode, only [AUTO] is available.
• When set to S (Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at 80.
• When the shooting mode is set to (Report), the AUTO is fixed at
80-6400. Other sensitivities can also be selected.
Saving the Sensitivity setting 1p.158
3
Setting ISO Correction in AUTO
Set the sensitivity range when the sensitivity is set to AUTO.
The sensitivity can be set to 80-100, 80-200, 80-400, 80-800, and 80-1600.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [ISO
Corction in AUTO].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the sensitivity
adjustment range.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-100
ISO80-200
ISO80-400
ISO80-800
ISO80-1600
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set to
O
(On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when Highlight
Correction is set to P (Off).
132
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 133 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture.
Use this function to take pictures that are intentionally overexposed or underexposed.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [EV
Compensation].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select the EV value.
Rec. Mode 2/4
To brighten, select a positive (+) value. To darken, select a negative
(–) value.
You can choose the EV setting in the range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV in 1/3 EV steps.
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
MENU
Exit
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• When a histogram is displayed in Still Picture Capture mode or
Playback mode, you can check whether the exposure is correct (p.34).
• EV Compensation cannot be used in b (Auto Picture) or 9 (Green) mode.
Saving the EV Compensation setting 1p.158
3
133
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 134 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Correcting the Brightness (D-Range Setting)
Expands the dynamic range and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring. [Highlight Correction] adjusts the bright areas when the image is too bright and [Shadow Correction] adjusts the dark areas when the image is too dark.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [D-Range
Setting].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Highlight
Correction] or [Shadow
Correction].
D-Range Setting
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
P
The camera returns to capture status.
The D-Range Setting icon appears on the display.
P
Q
O
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O
When [Shadow Correction] is set to
O
When [Highlight Correction] and
[Shadow Correction] are set to O
3 8
• When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set to O (On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when
Highlight Correction is set to P (Off).
• If you change the [Highlight Correction] or [Shadow Correction] setting
frequently, you can save time by assigning it to the Green button (p.139).
134
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 135 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
D-Range settings are not applicable in b (Auto Picture)/9 (Green) modes.
Setting Pixel Track SR
You can set this function to correct for camera shake when taking still shots. If Pixel Track SR is set to O (On), the camera automatically corrects for camera shake in the images you shot. The default setting is
P
(Off).
Shake reduction settings in C (Movie) and (Underwater Movie)
mode are configured under Movie SR (p.153).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Pixel Track
SR].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between
O
(On) or P (Off).
O
(On) Automatically corrects for camera shake.
Rec. Mode
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Movie
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
2/4
AUTO
ISO80-800
0.0
P
(Off) No correction for camera shake.
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
MENU Exit
3
In 9 (Green), X (Digital Wide), F (Digital Panorama), C (Movie),
(Underwater Movie), N (Frame Composite), and S (Fireworks) mode, the Pixel Track SR is fixed at P (Off).
The Pixel Track SR may not be effective when the shutter speed is slow.
We recommend you turn off the [Pixel Track SR] setting P (off) and use a tripod for slow shutterspeeds.
135
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 136 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Setting the Interval Shooting
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a set interval from a set time.
Interval
Number of Shots
10 sec. – 99 min.
2 shots – number of recordable images
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals. The intervals can be set in increments of one second from ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in 1 minute increments from 4 to 99 minutes. You cannot set the camera to take interval shots for less than ten seconds.
You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it cannot exceed the number of recordable images.
You can set 1 minute increments for the first 59 minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Interval
Shoot].
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
3/4
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
Interval Shoot
1 Press the four-way controller
(5).
Interval
Number of Shots
0 min.
2
10 sec.
2 Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the minutes, then press the
four-way controller (5).
Start Delay
MENU
0 hr.
0 min.
3 Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the seconds, then press the four-way controller (5).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Interval].
136
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 137 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].
6
Set the number of shots.
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set [Number of Shots],
then press the four-way controller (5).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Number of Shots].
7
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
Interval Shoot
1 Press the four-way controller
(5).
The current time and the recording start time are displayed in real-time.
Current Time
Start Time
Start Delay 0
10:00
10:00 hr.
0 min.
2 Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the hours, then press the
four-way controller (5).
MENU Cancel OK OK
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press
the four-way controller (5).
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to the shooting screen. The operations up to this point have only configured the [Interval Shoot] settings. To actually use interval shooting, you must select [Interval Shoot] from the drive mode.
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot) 1p.108
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),
F
(Digital Panorama), X (Digital Wide), S (Fireworks) and
O (Voice Recording) modes.
• Refer to p.154 for instructions on interval shooting for C (Movie) and
(Underwater Movie).
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is being performed.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
3
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the Drive Mode
137
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 138 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Setting Blink Detection
This specifies whether Blink Detection works when you use the Face
Detection function. The default setting is O (On).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Blink
Detection].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between O
(On) or P (Off).
O
(On) Blink Detection function works.
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
3/4
P
(Off) Blink Detection function does not work.
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
MENU Exit
If the Blink Detection function detected closed eyes when shooting,
[Closed eyes have been detected] is displayed for 3 seconds during
Instant Review.
138
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 139 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Instant Review
Use this setting to specify whether or not an Instant Review is displayed immediately after images are shot. The default setting is O (On: displays the image).
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Instant
Review].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between O
(On) or P (Off).
O
(On) Instant Review is displayed.
P
(Off) Instant Review is not displayed.
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU
Exit
3/4
3
Setting the Green Button
You can assign one of the following functions to the Green button:
[Green Mode] (p.86), [Voice Recording] (p.224) or [Fn Setting] (p.141).
You can activate the assigned function by just pressing the Green button.
When the shooting mode is set to 9 (Green) Mode, [Green Button] settings cannot be configured on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure the settings, first switch to a mode other than 9.
139
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 140 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Assigning a Function
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(23) to select [Green
Button].
Rec. Mode
Interval Shoot
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Memory
Green Button
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function you
want to assign.
Green Button
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Fn Setting
3/4
MENU
Cancel
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
[Green Mode] is registered as the default setting.
OK OK
140
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 141 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Registering Frequently Used Functions (Fn Setting)
You can register frequently used functions on the four-way controller.
Using this function, you can directly set the functions by pressing the four-way controller without displaying the menu in Capture mode.
In [Fn Setting], still picture mode and Movie mode have different settings.
To execute [Fn Setting] in movie mode, press the MENU button in Movie mode in step 1 on page p.140.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Fn Setting].
Green Button
+
+
+
+
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Fn Setting
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
WB White Balance
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The [Fn Setting] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a key you want
to assign a function to.
+
+
+
+
Green Button
Fn Setting
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
WB White Balance
MENU
7
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
8
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the function
you want to register.
Green Button
+
+
+
+
WB
ISO
AF
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Sensitivity
Focusing Area
MENU Cancel
9
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
OK OK
3
141
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 142 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
This function is activated only when you assign the [Fn Setting] to the
Green button.
You can assign only one function to each key.
3
The default settings for Fn settings
Still picture mode
Default setting (2) EV Compensation
(3) Recorded Pixels
(4) Quality Level
(5) White Balance
Movie mode
(2) Movie SR
(3) EV Compensation
(4) Recorded Pixels
(5) White Balance
Functions that can be assigned to each key
Selectable items
Still picture mode
EV Compensation
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Sensitivity
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
AE Metering
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *
Contrast
Movie mode
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
White Balance
Focusing Area
EV Compensation
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *
Contrast
* The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. When you have selected either [Bright] or [Natural], [Saturation] is displayed, and when [Monochrome] is selected, [Tone Adjustment] is displayed.
142
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 143 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changing Assigned Items
Press the Green button in the shooting mode to display the Fn Setting screen. Select an item with the four-way controller (2345), and press either the (23) or (45) four-way controller to change the settings.
Setting the Image Sharpness (Sharpness)
You can give the image sharp or soft outlines.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sharpness].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to change the
sharpness level.
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
4/4
Date Imprint
F
Soft
Off
Macro Light
G
Normal
MENU Exit
H
Sharp
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
3
143
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 144 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Setting the Saturation/Tone Adjustment
You can set either color brightness (Saturation) or the tone of monochrome images (Tone Adjustment).
The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected on the [A Rec. Mode] menu.
Selected Image Tone
Bright, Natural
Monochrome
Displayed item
Saturation
Tone Adjustment
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Saturation]
(Tone Adjustment).
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select the level of
saturation (or tone).
F
Low (Blue for tone)
G
Normal (B&W for tone)
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
4/4
Off
MENU Exit
H
High (Sepia for tone)
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
144
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 145 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Image Contrast (Contrast)
For setting the image contrast level.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Contrast].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to change the contrast
level.
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
4/4
Contrast
Date Imprint
F
Low
Off
Macro Light
G
Normal
MENU
Exit
H
High
4
Press the 3 button.
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
3
Setting the Date Imprint Function
You can choose whether to imprint the date and/or time when taking still pictures.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Date Imprint].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the Date
Imprint details.
Choose from [Date], [Date & Time],
[Time] or [Off].
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
4 / 4
Date
Date & Time
Time
Off
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
145
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 146 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
• The date and/or time imprinted with the [Date Imprint] function cannot be deleted.
• Note that if the printer or the image editing software is set to print the date and the images to be printed already have the date and/or time imprinted, the imprinted dates and/or times may overlap.
• O appears on the display in A mode when [Date Imprint] is set to any setting other than [Off].
• The date and/or time are imprinted on the picture with the display
format set in the [Date Adjustment] screen (p.55).
Setting the Macro Light
Set whether or not to turn on the 3 macro lights around the lens.
The macro lights turn on when the [Macro Light] is set to O.
The default setting is P.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the [Macro
Light].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select [O (On)/
P
(Off)].
O
(On) Turns on the light
Rec. Mode
Sharpness
Saturation
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
4/4
Off
P (Off) Turns off the light
The setting is saved.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to capture mode.
MENU
Exit
146
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 147 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• In (Digital Microscope) mode, light turns on regardless of whether the setting is turned on or off.
• If the Power Saving is set to on, the light turns off after the set time.
• The macro lights turn off during playback and when using the USB connector except when outputting video in Digital Microscope mode.
If the Self Timer and Remote Control are set in the drive mode, then the
Self Timer lamp and the 3 LEDs for macro photography are:
Macro Light is P (Off): The macro light and the Self Timer lamp blink when counting down.
Macro Light is O (On): The macro light stays on when counting down.
3
147
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 148 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Taking Pictures Underwater
3
Taking Underwater Pictures (Underwater Mode/
Underwater Movie Mode)
This camera complies with JIS waterproof grade 8 and can be used to take pictures at a depth of 6 m continuously for 2 hours. In addition, this camera complies with JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68).
Use the Underwater mode to take underwater still pictures that capture the blueness of the sea.
Use the Underwater Movie mode to record movies underwater.
Shutter release button
Four-way controller
4 button
148
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
(Underwater) or (Underwater Movie).
3
Press the 4 button.
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses on the subject at the correct distance.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
If you selected , the picture is taken.
If you selected , recording starts. To stop recording, press the shutter release button fully. Perform the same steps as C (Movie) mode to record movies.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 149 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Before taking pictures underwater, make sure that there is no dirt or sand on the waterproof seal of the battery/card and terminal covers and check that the covers are securely locked.
• Before opening the battery/card and terminal covers after using the camera underwater, make sure that there is no water, dirt, or sand on the covers or anywhere else on the camera. Wipe the camera before opening the covers.
• In mode, AE metering is set to multi-segment metering.
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and Shockproof Design 1p.8
• The flash will not discharge in mode.
• When the Focus Mode is set to =, q, or , pictures are taken by pressing the shutter release button half-way down to lock the focus before shooting.
• When the Focus Mode is set to \, you can adjust the focus before recording starts and during recording.
• Optical and digital zoom can be used in Underwater Movie mode before recording starts. Digital Zoom can also be used during recording.
3
Although the camera is designed to be waterproof and dustproof, avoid using the camera under the following conditions. It may momentarily be subjected to water pressure beyond that covered in the guarantee and water may enter the interior of the camera.
• Jumping into the water while holding the camera
• Swimming while holding the camera in your hand
• Using the camera in environments where water is applied forcefully, such as strong river currents and waterfalls
149
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 150 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Recording Movies
3
Recording Movies
This mode enables you to record movies. Sound is recorded at the same time.
Microphone
Shutter release button w /x button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.
The Capture Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select C
(Movie).
Movie
F o r r e c o r d i n g m o v i e s
MENU Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
C
(Movie) mode is selected and the
1
camera returns to capture mode.
The following information appears on the display.
1 Movie mode icon
2 Movie shake reduction icon
3 Remaining recordable time
REC
0 7 : 3 4
4 REC indicator (blinks during recording)
2 3 4
5 Focus frame (does not appear during recording)
5
1 / 2
OK OK
150
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 151 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
You can change the captured area by pressing the w/x button.
x
Enlarges the subject w
Widens the area that is captured by the camera
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording starts. You can continue recording until the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card is full, or the size of the recorded movie reaches 2 GB.
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording stops.
3
• The flash does not discharge in C (Movie) mode.
• The focus mode can be changed before recording starts.
• When the focus mode is set to \(Manual Focus), you can adjust the focus before recording starts.
• Optical and digital zoom can be used before recording starts. Digital zoom is available during recording when digital zoom (p.89) is set to
O
(On).
• When the shooting mode is set to C (Movie), Face Detection is automatically set to on. You can select Smile Capture or Face
Detection Off by pressing the I button before starting recording a
movie (p.81). When Smile Capture function is activated, movie
recording starts automatically when the camera recognizes the subject’s smile. However, depending on the condition of the recognized faces, movie recording may not start automatically because the Smile Capture function may not work. If this happens, press the shutter release button to start movie recording.
• The volume of recorded audio may vary depending on the orientation of the microphone, which is on the top of the camera.
• You can record a movie using the remote control unit (optional) (p.106).
• When you change the display by pressing the 4/W button while recording a movie, the registered subscreen is not displayed.
Keeping the Shutter Release Button Pressed
If you keep the shutter release button pressed for more than one second, recording will continue as long as you keep the button pressed. Shooting stops when you take your finger off the shutter release button.
151
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 152 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Frame Rate for Movies
You can choose the number of recorded pixels and frame rate settings for movies.
The more pixels there are, the clearer the details and the bigger the file size. The more frames per second, the better the quality of the movie, but the file size becomes larger.
Setting
Recorded
Pixels
Frame
Rate
Use
M
F
G
H
I
J
1280×720
1280×720
640×480
640×480
320×240
320×240
30 fps
15 fps
30 fps
15 fps
30 fps
15 fps
Records images in HDTV format (16:9). Movement is recorded smoothly. (default setting)
Records images in HDTV format (16:9). Increases the total recording time by making the file size smaller.
Suitable for viewing on a TV or computer screen.
Movement is recorded smoothly.
Suitable for viewing on a TV or computer screen.
Increases the total recording time by making the file size smaller.
Suitable for posting on a website or attaching to email. Movement is recorded smoothly.
Suitable for posting on a website or attaching to email. Increases the total recording time by making the file size smaller.
* The frame rate (fps) indicates the number of frames per second.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recorded
Pixels].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
152
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 153 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the number
of recorded pixels and frame rate.
Rec. Time
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
02:26
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
The following restrictions may cause the selected recording time and the actual recording time to be different.
• The maximum size of a file is limited to 2 GB.
3
Setting the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)
Function
In C (Movie) mode, you can compensate for camera shake while you are recording a movie with the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction) function.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie SR].
153
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 154 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
5
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O (On) or
P
(Off).
O (On) Automatically corrects for camera shake.
P (Off) No correction for camera shake.
The setting is saved.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
Movie
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
MENU
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set
Interval (Interval Movie)
In this mode, you can record multiple still pictures taken automatically at a set interval from a set time, as a movie file.
Interval
Total Time
Start Delay
You can set this to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Set the total time, from 10 minutes to 359 hours. The total time and the settable units change depending on the interval set. The Interval can be set in increments of 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Set the start delay, from 0 minutes to 24 hours. The start delay can be set in increments of 1 minute for a delay time up to 59 minutes, and increments of 1 hour for a delay time longer than one hour. If the start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.
154
Setting from Drive Mode
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in C or
mode.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select k (Interval
Shoot) and press the 4
button.
The current Interval Movie setting appears for approximately one minute. To take pictures with the current settings, go to step 10.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 155 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.
The Interval Movie setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the frame.
4
Set the interval.
Interval Shoot
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
Interval
Total Time
1 min.
0 hr.
10 min.
2 Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the interval, then press the
4 button.
The frame returns to [Interval].
5
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Total Time].
6
Set the total time.
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
Start Delay
MENU
0 hr.
min.
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press
the four-way controller (5).
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press
the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Total Time].
7
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Start Delay].
8
Set the start delay.
1 Press the four-way controller (5).
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press
the four-way controller (5).
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press
the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Start Delay].
9
Press the 3 button.
The Interval movie setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.
3
155
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 156 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
10
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.
11
Press the shutter release button fully.
Interval movie recording starts.
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power switch during standby to display the remaining time and interval on the monitor.
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval movie.
Setting from Menu
You can set the Interval Movie from [A Rec. Mode] menu.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the [Movie].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the [Interval
Shoot].
Movie
Recorded Pixels
Movie SR
Interval Shoot
MENU
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The interval movie setting screen appears. The rest of the procedure is the same as steps 4-11 in “Setting from Drive Mode”. See those procedures if you need more information.
156
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 157 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Confirm that the battery is sufficiently charged before starting interval movie recording. If the battery is not sufficiently charged, it may become depleted during interval movie recording and cause recording of the movie to stop.
• When performing interval movie shooting, the settings are fixed as follows; Recorded Pixels: m, Quality Level: C, Movie SR: P (Off), and Flash Mode: a. However, shooting is done at a frame rate
according to the recorded pixels (p.152) set on the Movie menu.
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted during standby.
• Sound cannot be recorded in Interval Movie mode.
• If you set a start delay, a start time corresponding to the current time and the start delay you set is displayed in real time.
• The total time you can set differs according to the shooting interval you set, as indicated in the table below.
Interval
1 min
5 min
10 min
30 min
1 hr
30 fps
Total time that can be set
15 fps
10 minutes to 5 hours and 59 minutes
(in increments of 1 minute)
30 minutes to 29 hours and
55 minutes
(in increments of 5 minutes)
10 minutes to 5 hours and 59 minutes
(in increments of 1 minute)
15 minutes to 29 hours and 55 minutes
(in increments of 5 minutes)
1 hour to 59 hours and 50 minutes
(in increments of 10 minutes)
3 hours to 179 hours and 30 minutes
(in increments of 30 minutes)
6 hours to 359 hours
(in increments of 1 hour)
30 minutes to 59 hours and 50 minutes
(in increments of 10 minutes)
1 hour and 30 minutes to 179 hours and 30 minutes
(in increments of 30 minutes)
3 hours to 359 hours
(in increments of 1 hour)
3
157
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 158 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Saving the Settings (Memory)
3
The Memory function is for saving the current camera settings when the camera is turned off.
For some camera settings, the Memory function is always set to O (On) (the settings are saved when the camera is turned off), while for others you can choose on or off (to choose whether the settings are saved or not when the camera is turned off). The items which can be set to On or Off in the Memory function are shown in the table below. (Items not listed here are always saved in the selected settings when the camera is turned off.)
If you select O (On), the settings will be saved in the status they were in immediately before the camera was turned off. If you select P (Off), the settings will be reset to the defaults when the camera is turned off. The table below also shows whether the Memory default setting for each item is on or off.
Default setting
P
Page
File No.
Item
Face Detection
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
AE Metering
Digital Zoom
DISPLAY
Description
A Face Detection mode set by using the I button.
The flash mode set with the four-way controller (4)
The drive mode set with the four-way controller (2)
The focus mode set with the four-way controller (5)
The zoom position set with the w/x button.
The manual focus position set with the fourway controller (23)
The [White Balance] setting on the [A Rec.
Mode] menu
The [Sensitivity] setting on the [A Rec.
Mode] menu
The [EV Compensation] setting on the [A
Rec. Mode] menu
The [AE Metering] setting on the [A Rec.
Mode] menu
The [Digital Zoom] setting on the [A Rec.
Mode] menu
The display information display mode set with the 4/W button
If a new SD Memory Card is inserted when
On has been selected, file numbers are assigned sequentially.
O
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
O
P
O
p.120
p.89
⎯
158
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 159 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Memory].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose an item.
Memory 1/3
Face Detection
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P (Off).
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to capture mode.
3
159
160
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 160 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 161 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Playing Back and
Deleting Images
Playing Back Images .............................. 162
Deleting Images and Sound Files .......... 176
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment
................................................................... 184
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 162 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Playing Back Images
Playing Back Still Pictures
4
1
Press the Q button after
taking a picture.
The camera enters the Q mode and the image appears on the display.
Displaying one image in full in Q mode
(Q mode default setting) is called single-image display.
Edit
To Play Back the Previous or Next Image
2
Press the four-way controller (45).
The previous or next image appears.
To Delete the Displayed Image
Press the i button while the image is displayed to display the Delete screen.
Press the four-way controller (2) to select
[Delete] and press the 4 button.
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button i
button
File number
Delete
Cancel
For information on other deletion procedures 1p.176
162
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 163 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Playing Back a Movie
You can play back the movies you have taken. The sound is played back at the same time.
Speaker f
/y button
Q
button
Four-way controller
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the movie you want to play back.
2
Press the four-way controller
(2).
Playback starts.
4
Edit
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (2)
Plays back in reverse
Pauses playback
Zoom button (y)
Zoom button (f)
Increases the volume
Reduces the volume
Press and hold the four-way controller (5) Fast-forwards playback
Press and hold the four-way controller (4) Fast-reverses playback
The following operations can be performed while playback is paused.
Four-way controller (5)
Four-way controller (2)
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
Playback stops.
Forwards the frame
Resumes playback
163
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 164 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Multi-Image Display
f
/y button
Q
button
3 button
Four-way controller
4 button
6-Image Display/12-Image Display
4
You can display 6 or 12 thumbnails of captured images at a time.
1
Press the f button in Q mode.
The 6-image display appears showing a page consisting of 6 thumbnail images. Pressing the f button again changes it to a
12-image display.
A page consisting of 6 or 12 thumbnail images appears. The displayed images change 6- or 12-images at a time page by page.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame. If there are too many images to fit on one page, pressing the four-way controller (24) while image 1 is selected will display the previous page. Similarly, if you choose image 2 and press the fourway controller (35), the next page appears.
♦ indicates that the previous or next screen is stored in a separate folder.
Select & Delete 100-0010
6-Image Display
Folder divider icon
Frame
1
1
2
2
Select & Delete
12-Image Display
100-0010
164
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 165 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
The icons that appear on the images indicate the following:
O
C
(No icon)
(With image)
Still picture without sound
Still picture with sound
Movie (the first frame appears)
O (Without image) Sound files only
Press the 4 button to switch to single-image display of the selected image.
Press the Q button to switch to A mode.
Folder Display/Calendar Display
Press the f button in 12-image display to switch to folder or calendar display. Press the Green button to switch between folder display and calendar display.
1
Press the f button twice in Q mode.
The screen changes to 12-image display.
2
Press the f button.
The screen changes to folder display or calendar display.
Folder display
The list of folders with recorded images and sound files appears.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame.
If you select a folder and press the y button or the 4 button, images in the folder are displayed in 12-image display.
Frame
101
105
102
106
103 104
101_0707
4
165
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 166 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Calendar display
Recorded images and sound files are displayed by date in calendar format.
The first image recorded on a date is displayed for that date on the calendar.
O
appears for dates on which the first recorded file was either sound-only data or a still picture with a voice
Frame
77
11
88 99
33 44 55 66
memo.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame.
If you select a date and press the y button, images taken on that date are displayed in 12-image display.
Select a date and press the 4 button to switch to single-image display of the first image recorded on that date.
• Press the 3 button in folder display or calendar display to switch to 12-image display.
• Press the Q button or half-press the shutter release button in folder display or calendar display to switch to A mode.
Using the Playback Function
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose an icon.
The guide for the selected function appears below.
Slideshow
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU Cancel
1 / 2
OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The playback function is recalled.
166
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 167 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Edit
MENU
Slideshow 1 / 2 Image Rotation 1 / 2
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
Press or
SHUTTER
halfway
R o t a t e s c a p t u r e d i m a g e s .
U s e f u l w h e n v i e w i n g v e r t i c a l i m a g e s o n a T V
MENU
Cancel
OK OK
OK
4
3 8
Closes the Playback Mode
Palette and goes to A mode.
MENU Cancel OK OK
Goes to the screen for selected playback function.
• When the frame is placed over an icon on the Playback Mode Palette, a guide for that function appears.
• You can turn the guide display off for the function on the Playback
167
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 168 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Playback Mode Palette
u s
N
Collage
P
Digital Filter
E
N
Playback Mode
Slideshow
Image Rotation
Small Face Filter
Ink Rubbing Filter
Original Frame
Frame Composite
Description
For continuously playing back images. Screen or sound effects can be set
Page
Rotates captured images. Useful when viewing vertical images on a TV
Processing image to reduce the size of a detected face
Creates an image similar to ink rubbing from original pictures
Creates a collage print page from saved image files p.200
For modifying images with a Color filter or Soft filter p.194
For making a frame by selecting your favorite frame type and color. Text can be entered, too
For composing an image with a frame. Select
Overwrite or Save as to save
[
Z
D n o p
\
Z Protect r
]
^
Movie
Edit
Save as
Still image
Divide
Movies
Adding title picture
Red-eye
Compensation
For saving one frame from a movie as a still picture
For dividing a movie into two
For adding a title picture to your movie
Subscreen Input
Resize
Cropping
Image/Sound
Copy
Voice Memo
DPOF
Image Recovery
Start-up Screen
For compensating red-eye. May not work due to the condition of the image
For displaying the selected image on the subscreen
Changes Recorded Pixels and Quality Level to make the file size smaller
For cropping images to the size you like. Saved as a new image
For copying images and sounds between the builtin memory and SD memory card
Attaches sound to images. Recording is possible till the memory card is full
Protects images and sounds from accidental deletion. Formatting will delete
For the print settings. Useful when printing at a printing service
For recovering image and sound files which were accidentally deleted
For setting a captured image as the Start-up
Screen
168
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 169 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Slideshow
You can play back recorded images and movies one after another.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image to start the slideshow with.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select u
(Slideshow).
Slideshow 1 / 2
F o r c o n t i n u o u s l y p l a y i n g b a c k i m a g e s . S c r e e n o r s o u n d e f f e c t s c a n b e s e t
MENU
Cancel
OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow setting screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Start].
Slideshow starts
Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
3sec.
Wipe
MENU OK
6
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow starts.
Pressing the 4 button during the slideshow pauses the slideshow.
To resume the slideshow, press the 4 button again.
7
Press any button other than the 4 button.
The slideshow stops.
4
169
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 170 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
To Set the Slideshow Conditions
You can set the playback interval and also a screen effect and sound effect for when one image changes to the next.
1
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Interval] in
step 5 on p.169.
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
3sec.
Wipe
MENU
2
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the interval
and press the 4 button.
Choose from [3sec.], [5sec.], [10sec.], [20sec.] or [30sec.].
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Screen
Effect].
After selecting [Screen Effect], press the four-way controller (5). A pull-down menu appears with the following items. Use the four-way controller (23) to select an item and press the 4 button.
Wipe
Checker
Fade
Off
The next image slides over the previous one from left to right
The next image appears in small square mosaic blocks
The current image gradually fades out and the next image fades in
No effect
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound
Effect].
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P
(Off).
Except when the [Screen Effect] is set to Off, you can choose O (On) or P (Off) for the sound that is played when one image changes to the next.
170
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 171 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start].
8
Press the 4 button.
The slideshow starts using the selected interval and effect.
• The slideshow will continue until you press any button other than the
4 button.
• Movies or pictures with sound will be played through to the end before the next picture is played back, regardless of the interval setting.
However, pressing the four-way controller (5) while playing back a movie or a picture with sound skips to the next image.
• Sound files made in O (Voice Recording) are not played back in the slideshow.
• Panorama images are displayed by scrolling from left to right in 4 seconds before the next picture is played back, regardless of the
Interval or Screen Effect setting.
4
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment 1p.184
171
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 172 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Rotating the Image
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button
4
1
Press the Q button after taking a picture.
The image appears on the display.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s
(Image Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The rotation selection screen (0°, Right 90°, Left 90°, or 180°) appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the
rotation direction and press
the 4 button.
The rotated image is saved.
MENU Cancel OK OK
• Panoramic images and movies cannot be rotated.
• Protected images can be rotated, but they cannot be saved in a rotated state.
172
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 173 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Zoom Playback
You can magnify an image up to ten times.
f /y button
Q
button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to magnify.
2
Press the y button.
The image is magnified (×1.1 to ×10). Holding down the y button continuously magnifies the image.
With Quick Zoom (p.253) set to O (On), pressing y once magnifies
the image to 10×.
You can use the + mark of the guide at the bottom left of the screen to check which portion of the image is magnified.
The following operations can be performed while an image is magnified.
Guide
Four-way controller (2345) Moves the position to be magnified
Zoom button right (y) Makes the image bigger (max. of 10×)
Zoom button left (f) Makes the image smaller (min. of 1.1×)
3
Press the 4 button.
The image returns to single-image display.
4
Movies cannot be magnified.
173
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 174 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically
(Face Close-up Playback)
You can enjoy playing back images with the subject’s faces zoomed up simply by pressing the I button (Face close-up playback) if the Face
Detection function operated when the images were taken.
4 f /y button
Q button
I
button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to magnify.
2
Confirm that the I icon is displayed in the image and
press the I button.
The image is magnified around the face first recognized when the image was taken.
If multiple faces were recognized when the image was taken, the subject’s faces are zoomed up on each time the I button is pressed in order of the recognition during shooting.
174
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 175 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
The following operations can be performed during Face close-up playback mode.
Zoom button right (y)
Zoom button left (f)
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly larger magnification ratio.
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly smaller magnification ratio.
3
Press the 4 button.
The image returns to single-image display.
• Face close-up playback is not available for images that are saved as still pictures from the movies.
• The magnification ratio for Face close-up playback may differ depending on the conditions such as the size of the face recognized when shooting.
• Face close-up playback is also available for pet’s faces recorded in C
(Pet) mode.
4
175
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 176 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Deleting Images and Sound Files
Delete images and sound files that you do not want to keep.
When images or sound files are inadvertently deleted
The Optio W90 is equipped with a function to recover images and sounds
deleted on the camera (p.180).
Deleted images and sound files can be recovered even if the camera has been turned off after deletion as long as the SD Memory Card has not been removed.
However, deleted images and sound files cannot be recovered after operations to write data such as taking pictures, recording movies, protecting images, saving DPOF settings, resizing images, cropping images, or formatting has been performed.
4
Deleting a Single Image/Sound File
You can delete a single image or sound file.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.181).
176
Q
button
Four-way controller
4 button i button
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image/sound file you want to
delete.
2
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 177 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Delete].
Delete
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
Recovering Deleted Images 1p.180
To Delete a Sound File
If sound (voice memo) has been recorded with an image (p.228), you
can delete the sound without deleting the image.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image with sound.
U
appears on the images with sound.
2
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Delete Sound].
Delete Sound
Delete
Cancel
4
4
Press the 4 button.
The sound file is deleted.
• Select [Delete] in step 3 to delete both the image and sound file.
• You cannot delete only the sound in a movie.
177
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 178 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Deleting Selected Images and Sound Files
You can delete several images/sound files selected from the 6- or
12-image display at once.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.181).
4 f
/y button
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button i
button
1
Press the f button once or twice in Q mode.
6-image display or 12-image display appears.
2
Press the i button.
P appears on the images and sound files.
178
OK MENU Cancel Delete
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the
images and sound files that you want to delete and press
the 4 button.
MENU Cancel Delete OK
O appears on the selected images and sound files.
Pressing and holding the y button displays the selected image in a single screen and you can check whether to delete the image.
Releasing the button returns to 6- or 12-image display. However, protected images cannot be displayed in single-image display.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 179 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Press the i button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Select & Delete].
MENU
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images and sound files are deleted.
Select & Delete
Cancel
Deleting All Images and Sound Files
Deletes all the images and sound files at once.
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.181).
OK OK
4
Q button
Four-way controller
4 button
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
179
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 180 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Delete All].
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
5 sec.
3 min.
3/4
MENU Exit
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A confirmation dialog appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Delete All].
Delete All
Delete all images/sounds?
Delete All
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are deleted.
Recovering Deleted Images
You can recover images or sound files that were taken with this camera and then deleted.
If any of the following operations have been performed after deleting an image, the deleted image and sound file cannot be recovered.
• Shooting
• Protect setting/DPOF setting/Resizing/Cropping
• Registering a subscreen image
• Formatting
• Removing the SD Memory Card
1
After deleting a file, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
180
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 181 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select ] (Image
Recovery).
When 8 is displayed, there are no images that can be recovered.
Image Recovery
F o r r e c o v e r i n g i m a g e a n d s o u n d f i l e s w h i c h w e r e a c c i d e n t a l l y d e l e t e d
2 / 2
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The number of recoverable images appears.
If you selected 8 and pressed the 4 button, the message [No image to be processed] appears. In this case, press the 4 button to return to the Playback Mode Palette.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Recover].
5 image(s)
Want to recover?
4
Recover
Cancel
5
Press the 4 button.
The files are recovered.
• Recovered images and sound files have the same file name as before they were deleted.
• Up to a maximum of 999 deleted image files can be recovered.
Protecting Images and Sound Files from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect stored images and sound files from being accidentally deleted.
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the image you want to protect.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
181
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 182 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select Z
(Protect).
Protect 2 / 2
P r o t e c t s i m a g e s a n d s o u n d s f r o m a c c i d e n t a l d e l e t i o n .
F o r m a t t i n g w i l l d e l e t e
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting [Single Image/Sound] or [All Images/Sounds] appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Single Image/
Sound].
Single Image/Sound
182
6
Press the 4 button.
The message [Protects this image/sound] appears.
To protect another image or sound file, use the four-way controller
(45) to select another image or sound file.
7
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Protect].
Protects this image/sound
Protect
Unprotect
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The selected image or sound file is protected.
To protect other images or sound files, repeat Steps 5 to 8.
Select [Cancel] to exit the Protect settings.
• To cancel the Protect setting, select [Unprotect] in step 7.
• Y appears on the protected images and sound files during playback.
• The maximum number of images and sound files you can protect in succession with [Single Image/Sound] is 99.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 183 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Protect All Images and Sound Files
1
Select [All Images/Sounds] in step 5 on p.182.
All Images/Sounds
2
Press the 4 button.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Protect].
Protects all images/sounds
Protect
Unprotect
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are protected and the screen shown in
Step 1 reappears.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel] and
press the 4 button.
The Playback Mode Palette reappears.
Protected images and sound files will be deleted when the SD Memory
To cancel the Protect setting on all your images and sound files, select
[Unprotect] in step 3.
4
183
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 184 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Connecting the Camera to AV
Equipment
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jack or HDMl terminal and playback images.
• The power lamp on the camera lights up during a connection.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of
the AC adapter kit K-AC88 (optional) is recommended. (p.43)
• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating manual of the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the camera is connected.
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.
• The camera display turns off while the camera is connected to AV equipment.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera when connected to an
AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• When the camera is connected to an AV device, you can switch the images with the remote control (optional).
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack
By using the supplied AV cable (I-AVC7), you can capture and play back images on equipment with a video IN jack, such as a TV.
External Input
Terminal
VIDEO
AUDIO
(L) (R)
PC/AV terminal
Yellow White
184
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 185 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover.
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1, slide the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the direction shown by 3.
3
Connect the AV cable to the PC/AV terminal.
4
Connect the other ends of the AV cable (yellow: video, white: audio) to the video input terminal and audio input terminal of the AV device.
When using stereo sound equipment, insert the sound terminal into the
L (white) terminal.
5
Turn the AV device on.
When the device that the camera is connected to and the device that plays back images are different, turn both devices on.
When viewing images on AV equipment with multiple video input terminals (such as a TV), refer to the operation manual of the device and select the video input terminal to which to connect the camera.
6
Turn the camera on.
• Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail to be played back if the video output format is set different from the one in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting
• The camera’s AV output is output at normal resolution.
To watch movies shot at M or F at HDTV resolution, output the
movies as HDMI or transfer them to a computer (p.186).
4
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.
<How to close the terminal cover>
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3. While lightly pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.
185
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 186 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a device with an HDMI terminal.
HDMI terminal
4
186
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover.
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1, slide the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the direction shown by 3.
3
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI terminal.
4
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN jack on the AV device.
5
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected
AV device.
• The camera has a Type D (mini) HDMI terminal. Use a commercially available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.
• When connecting to an AV device with an HDMI terminal, only the playback mode can be used.
• If you playback the movie by connecting the camera to an AV device with a commercially available HDMI cable, set the output format to
“Selecting the HDMI Output Format” (p.247).
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 187 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.
<How to close the terminal cover>
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3. While lightly pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.
4
187
188
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 188 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 189 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Editing and Printing
Images
Editing Images ........................................ 190
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF) ...... 219
About Printing
You can print pictures taken with the camera in the following ways.
1. Go to a photo processing lab
2. Use a printer that has an SD Memory Card slot to print directly from the SD
Memory Card
3. Use the software that is available on your computer to print images
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 190 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Editing Images
Changing the Image Size (Resize)
By changing the size and quality of a selected image, you can make the file size smaller than the original. You can use this function to continue taking pictures when the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is full, by making the images smaller and overwriting the original images to make more space available.
• Panoramic images and movies cannot be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution and higher Quality Level than that of the original image.
5
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to resize.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select n
(Resize).
Resize
1 / 2
C h a n g e s R e c o r d e d P i x e l s a n d Q u a l i t y L e v e l t o m a k e t h e f i l e s i z e s m a l l e r
OK OK MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The screen for choosing the image size appears.
5
Select [Recorded Pixels] and
[Quality Level].
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose the size and quality.
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between [Recorded Pixels] and
[Quality Level].
Recorded Pixels 12M
190
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 191 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
7
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The resized image is saved.
Cropping Images
You can delete the unwanted part of a picture and save the cropped image as a separate image.
Panoramic images and movies cannot be resized.
5
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to crop.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select o (Cropping).
Cropping 2 / 2
F o r c r o p p i n g i m a g e s t o t h e s i z e y o u l i k e . S a v e d a s a n e w i m a g e
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
191
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 192 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
4
Press the 4 button.
The cropping screen appears.
The largest size of the cropped image is shown with a green frame on the screen. The cropped image cannot be larger than this cropping frame size.
5
Choose the cropping area.
The following operations move the green frame and set the area for cropping on the screen.
Zoom button
(f/y)
Changes the size of the cropped section
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the cropping position up, down, left and right
Green Button Rotates the cropping frame
• The button is only displayed when the cropping frame size can be rotated.
6
Press the 4 button.
The cropped image is saved with a new file name.
The number of recorded pixels is selected automatically according to the size of the cropped section. The image is saved at the same quality level as the original.
Processing Images So That Faces Look Smaller
Images are processed to reduce the size of people’s faces detected with
the Face Detection function (p.81) when taking pictures so that they look
smaller.
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
192
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 193 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select N (Small
Face Filter).
Small Face Filter 1 / 2
R e d u c e s t h e s i z e o f f a c e s i n t h e i m a g e , f o r w e l l p r o p o r t i o n e d p o r t r a i t s
MENU
Cancel
OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
Face detection frames for faces that can be corrected are displayed.
Proceed to Step 6 when there is only one detection frame.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a face to
be processed.
A green frame indicates the face that is to be processed.
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Use the four-way controller
(45) to change the reduction
ratio.
F
Approx. 5%
G
Approx. 7%
H
Approx. 10%
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.
9
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
193
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 194 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to Q mode and the processed image is displayed.
You may not be able to process images in the following situations:
• When the size of face taken in relation to an image is too large or too small
• When faces are located in the edges of an image
In such cases, the face detection frame in Step 4 will not appear.
5
Using the Digital Filters
This mode lets you change the color tones and perform special processing on a selected image.
B&W
Sepia
Toy Camera
Retro
Color
Extract Color
Changes color images to black and white.
Processes the image using the sepia filter.
Images seem to have been taken with a toy camera.
Images have the feel of old photos with a white border. You can choose from three filters: Original image, amber, and blue.
Processes the image using the selected color filter. You can choose from six filters: red, pink, purple, blue, green, and yellow.
Processes the image using the selected color extraction filter. You can choose from three filters: red, green, and blue.
Color Emphasis There are 4 filters: Sky Blue/Fresh Green/Delicate Pink/Autumn
Leaves.
High Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the captured images.
Starburst Processes the image with a special sparkling look achieved by adding cross-like effects to a highlighted area, such as town lights at night, light reflected from water, or other light sources. You can choose from three filters: Cross, Heart, and Star.
Soft Processes the image into a soft image that appears soft overall.
Fish-eye Applies a fish-eye lens effect to images.
Brightness Filter Adjusts the brightness of the image.
Panoramic images, movies or images taken with another camera cannot be edited using Digital Filter function. An error message appears if you choose this function from the Playback Mode Palette and press the 4 button.
194
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 195 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select P (Digital
Filter).
Digital Filter 1 / 2
F o r m o d i f y i n g i m a g e s w i t h a C o l o r f i l t e r o r S o f t f i l t e r
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The digital filter selection screen appears.
1 B&W
2 Sepia
3 Toy Camera
4 Retro
5 Color
6 Extract Color
7 Color Emphasis
8 High Contrast
9 Starburst
10 Soft
11 Fish-eye
12 Brightness Filter
1 1
Subsequent steps vary depending on your selection.
5
195
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 196 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Select a B&W, Sepia or Soft Filter
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a digital
filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
7
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
8
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
196
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 197 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Select a Retro, Color, Extract Color, Color Emphasis or
Starburst Filter
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the digital
filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the effect.
Retro
Four-way controller
(4)
Blue
Default Setting
Original image
Four-way controller
(5)
Amber
Color Red
↔ Pink ↔ Purple ↔ Blue ↔ Green ↔ Yellow
Extract Color Red
↔ Green ↔ Blue
Color Emphasis Sky Blue
↔ Fresh Green ↔ Delicate Pink ↔ Autumn Leaves
Starburst Cross
↔ Heart ↔ Star
7
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
8
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
9
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
197
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 198 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Select a Toy Camera, High Contrast, Fish-eye or Brightness
Filter
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a digital
filter you want to use.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
(45) to adjust the effect.
5
Toy Camera
High
Contrast
Fish-eye
Brightness
Filter
Four-way controller
(4)
Weak
Weak
Weak
Dark
Default Setting
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Four-way controller
(5)
Strong
Strong
Strong
Bright
7
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
8
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
9
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
198
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 199 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the Ink Rubbing Filter
You can edit the image to look like an ink rubbing.
The Ink Rubbing Filter cannot be used on the following images.
• Panoramic images or movies
• Images that have recorded pixels of f, W, h, L,
V, l, or m
• Images taken with other cameras
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the image you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select
(Ink
Rubbing Filter).
Ink Rubbing Filter
C r e a t e s a n i m a g e s i m i l a r t o i n k r u b b i n g f r o m o r i g i n a l p i c t u r e s
1 / 2
MENU
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the effect.
F
Weak
G
Standard
H
Strong
OK OK
6
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
5
199
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 200 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
8
Press the 4 button.
The images processed with the filter are saved.
• The processed images are saved with the recorded pixels of f/W.
• When there is little contrast between the object and the background, the shape of the object may not be sharp depending on the conditions of the original image.
5
Creating a Collage Image
Make a collage image by placing captured images on a selected pattern.
The collage function cannot be used on the following images.
• Panoramic images or movies
• Images that have recorded pixels of h, L,
V, l, or m
• Image taken with other cameras
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter Q mode and press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select
(Collage).
Collage 1 / 2
C r e a t e s a c o l l a g e p r i n t p a g e f r o m s a v e d i m a g e f i l e s
MENU Cancel OK OK
200
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 201 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the 4 button.
The item selection screen appears.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
3
M
MENU
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the
[Recorded Pixels].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the recorded
pixels.
You can choose from h or L.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
3
M
2.1
M
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
7
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
Selecting the Layout Pattern
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the
[Layout].
9
Press the four-way controller
(5).
A pull-down menu appears.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
3
M
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
201
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 202 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the pattern
of layout.
You can choose from 3 patterns of layout ( / / ).
11
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
5
Selecting the Background
12
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose
[Backgnd.].
13
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
14
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the
background.
You can choose the white background or the black background.
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
MENU Cancel
15
Press the 4 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
3
M
OK OK
202
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 203 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Laying Out the Image
• The collage function cannot be used on the following images.
- Panoramic images or movies
- Images that have recorded pixels of h, L,
V, l, or m
- Images taken with other cameras
These images do not appear as selectable items.
• If you select an image with a 16:9 aspect ratio, the black areas appear above and below the image.
16
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose [Select
image(s)].
17
Press the four-way controller (5).
The images to be selected appear.
18
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image to
include and press the 4
button.
The selected image is placed in the highlighted area in the guide. The guide appears on the top left of the monitor.
19
Repeat step 18 to lay out the rest images.
20
Press the 9 button.
Returns to the item selection screen.
OK
5
203
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 204 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Saving the Edited Image
21
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Create an
image].
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Backgnd.
Select image(s)
Create an image
MENU
22
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for saving the image appears.
23
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Save].
3
M
OK OK
Save
Cancel
OK OK
24
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved.
The quality level of the image is fixed at C (Best).
204
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 205 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Red-eye Compensation
You can correct images where the flash has caused the subject to appear with red eyes.
• The red-eye compensation function cannot be used on panoramic images, movies or on images where red eyes cannot be detected on the camera. An error message appears in step 4.
• The red-eye compensation function can only be used with still pictures taken with this camera.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image you want to correct.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select Z (Red-
eye Compensation).
Red-eye Compensation 1 / 2
F o r c o m p e n s a t i n g r e d - e y e .
M a y n o t w o r k d u e t o t h e c o n d i t i o n o f t h e i m a g e
OK OK MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved.
205
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 206 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Adding a Frame (Frame Composite)
This function lets you add a decorative frame to still pictures. There are
90 frames already stored in the camera.
The frame composite function cannot be used on the following images.
• Panoramic images or movies
• Images that have recorded pixels of h, L,
V, l, or m
An error message appears in step 4.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image to which you want to add a
frame.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select N (Frame
Composite).
Frame Composite 1 / 2
F o r c o m p o s i n g a n i m a g e w i t h a f r a m e . S e l e c t O v e r w r i t e o r S a v e a s t o s a v e
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose a frame.
206
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 207 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Press the y button.
The selected frame appears in singleimage display.
You can choose another frame using either of the following operations.
Four-way controller (45)
Zoom button left (f)
Press to choose a different frame.
Press to return to the
12-frame display of the frame selection screen, and then perform step 5 to choose a different frame.
7
Press the 4 button.
The frame position and size adjustment screen appears.
You can adjust the image using either of the following operations.
Press to adjust the position of the image
Cancel
Four-way controller
(2345)
Zoom button
(f/y)
Press to make the image larger or smaller.
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation does not appear.
9
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
10
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of h (2048×1536)/L (1920×1080).
207
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 208 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Optional Frames
The optional frames are stored in the built-in memory in the Optio W90. These optional frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a computer or the built-in memory is formatted. To reload the optional frames into the built-in memory, copy the files from the CD-ROM (S-SW102) supplied with the camera.
To Copy Frames
1
Remove the SD Memory Card from the camera.
If you leave the SD Memory Card in the camera, the frames will be copied onto the card, not into the camera’s built-in memory.
2
Connect the camera to the computer using the provided USB cable (I-USB7).
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.261) for instructions on
connecting the camera to a computer.
3
When the device detection window opens, click
[Cancel].
4
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW102) into the CD-ROM drive.
5
When the installer window opens, click [EXIT].
6
If there is not already a “FRAME” folder in the root directory of the camera (Removable Disk), create the folder.
7
Copy the desired files from the FRAME folder in the root directory of the CD-ROM to the FRAME folder on the camera (Removable Disk).
For information on working with files on your computer, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the computer.
8
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and camera.
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.261) for instructions on
disconnecting the camera from a computer.
• Frames can be stored both in the built-in memory and on the SD Memory
Cards, but using large numbers of frames may slow down processing times.
208
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 209 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Use a New Frame
The frames downloaded from the PENTAX website or other source can be used for adding a frame to pictures.
• Extract the downloaded frame and copy it to the FRAME folder in the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card.
• The FRAME folder is created when the SD Memory Card is formatted with this camera.
• For more information on downloading, refer to the PENTAX website.
Overlaying Your Original Frame on an Image
You can overlay your original frame (decorative frame) on an image. You can select the type and color of an original frame and its position.Text can also be entered.
Frame
Type of original frame
Blur/Edge Composite
Frame Type
Color
F
(All sides)/G (Upper and lower sides)/H (Right and left sides)/
I
(Upper side)/J (Lower side)/K (Left side)/L (Right side)
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green
Text Stamp
Available characters
A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9, Symbols
Display Position
Color
M
(Upper-left)/N (Upper-center)/O (Upper-right)/P (Lower-left)/
Q
(Lower-center)/R (Lower-right)
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green
5
The Original Frame function cannot be used on panoramic images, images recorded with h/L/
V/l/m in [Recorded Pixels], or movies. An error message appears in Step 4.
209
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 210 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the image you want to add a frame.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select E
(Original Frame).
Original Frame
Av a i l a b l e t o m a k e f r o m t h e k i n d a n d c o l o r o f a f r a m e .
Av a i l a b l e t o e n t e r t e x t
1 / 2
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The original frame type selecting screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an original
frame type, and press the 4
button.
The frame setting screen appears.
Blur
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Frame Type],
and press the four-way
controller (5).
Frame Type
Color
Text Stamp
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a frame type,
and press the four-way controller (4).
8
Set [Color] in the same way as in Steps 6 and 7.
9
Adjust the position of the frame and image.
For details, refer to “To Adjust the Position of the Frame and an Image”
(p.211).
210
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 211 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Text
Stamp], and press the four-way controller (5).
The Text Stamp screen appears.
When you do not enter characters, proceed to Step 12.
11
Set up the text stamp.
For details, refer to “To Set Up Text
Stamp” (p.212).
Text Stamp
A
0
B
1
#
C
2
D E
3
+
4
=
F
5
$
G H
6
%
7 8
I J K
{
9
}
.
,
L M
(
N O
) [
P
]
Q
<
R
>
S
@
T UV
/
W
:
X
;
Y
Finish
!
Z
?
A/a
Delete One Character
MENU Cancel OK Enter
12
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.
13
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Overwrite] or
[Save as].
Overwrite original image?
Overwrite
Save as
Cancel
5
14
Press the 4 button.
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of f (2592×1944)/W (2592×1464).
To Adjust the Position of the Frame and an Image
1
Press the Green button.
The frame position adjustment screen appears.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Zoom button right
(y)
Zoom button left
(f)
Press to adjust the position of the frame
Press to make the frame larger
Press to make the frame smaller
//
211
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 212 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
2
Press the Green button.
The image position adjustment screen appears.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Zoom button right
(y)
Zoom button left
(f)
Press to adjust the position of the image
Press to make the image larger
Press to make the image smaller
3
Press the 4 button.
The screen returns to the original screen.
//
5
To Set Up Text Stamp
1
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a
character and press the 4
button.
The selected character is input.
Up to 52 characters can be input.
Text Stamp
A
0
B
1
#
C
2
D E
3
+
4
=
F
5
G
$
6
%
H
7 8
I J K
{
9
}
.
,
L M
(
N O
) [
P
]
Q
<
R
>
S
@
T UV
/
W
:
X
;
Y
Finish
!
Z
?
F R I ENDS
Delete One Character
MENU Cancel
A/a
OK OK
I
button
Zoom button right
(y)
Zoom button left
(f)
Green button
Press to switch between upper and lower case
Press to move the cursor to the right
Press to move the cursor to the left
Press to delete the character
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Finish]
and press the 4 button.
212
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 213 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Display
Position] and press the four-
way controller (5).
Display Position
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the display
position and press the four-way controller (4).
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Color] and
press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the color
and press the four-way controller (4).
To View the Preview Screen
1
Press the Green button.
The preview screen appears.
5
2
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the original screen.
3
Press the 4 button.
213
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 214 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Editing Movies
You can select a frame from the recorded movie to save as a still picture, divide a movie into two, or add a title picture to a movie.
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the movie you want to edit.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [ (Movie
Edit).
Movie Edit 1 / 2
C l i p p i n g s t i l l i m a g e f r o m m o v i e , m o v i e s e g m e n t a t i o n , a n d t o a d d t i t l e p i c t u r e
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The movie edit selection screen appears.
Save as Still Image
To Save a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture
5
Select [Save as Still Image] on the movie edit selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for selecting a frame to be saved as a still picture.
214
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 215 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to choose the frame
you want to save.
2 Plays or pauses the movie
3
Stops the movie and returns to the first frame
4
Reverses the movie frame by frame
5
Advances the movie frame by frame
8
Press the 4 button.
The selected frame is saved as a still picture.
Select the image to save
100-0042
00:06
11
To Divide a Movie
5
Select [Divide Movies] on the movie edit selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen for choosing the dividing position appears.
7
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to determine the
dividing position.
2
Plays or pauses the movie
Select image for dividing position
100-0042
00:09
11
3 Stops the movie and returns to the first frame
4 Reverses the movie frame by frame
5
Advances the movie frame by frame
8
Press the 4 button.
A confirmation dialog appears.
9
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Divide].
5
Divide
Cancel
215
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 216 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Press the 4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified position, the two portions are saved as new files, and the original one is deleted.
The protected movies cannot be divided.
5
To Add a Title Picture to a Movie
5
Select [Adding title picture] on the movie edit selection screen.
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for selecting a title picture.
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose the desired
title picture.
Only images available for use with the title picture are displayed.
8
Press the 4 button.
The screen appears for confirming the position of the title picture.
9
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the position.
Specify the position of title picture to add
A
Adds the title picture to the beginning of the movie
B
Adds the title picture to the end of the movie
Cancel
10
Press the 4 button.
The selected picture is saved as the title picture.
216
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 217 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• When a title picture is added to the beginning of a movie: When the movie is played back, the still picture is played back for three seconds, and then the movie is played back. The still picture registered as title picture is used as the thumbnail of the movie.
When a title picture is added to the end of a movie: When the movie is played back, the movie is played back, and then the still picture is played back for three seconds. The thumbnail of the movie is not changed by adding a title picture to the end of the movie.
• Only a still image with the same aspect ratio as the movie can be set as the title picture.
Copying Images and Sound Files
You can copy images and sound files from the built-in memory to the SD
Memory Card and vice versa. This function can only be selected when an SD Memory Card has been inserted in the camera.
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the
SD Memory Card.
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select p (Image/
Sound Copy).
Image/Sound Copy
For copying images and sounds between the builtin memory and SD memory card
2 / 2
OK OK MENU Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
The copying method selection screen appears.
5
217
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 218 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
To Copy Files from the Built-in Memory to the SD Memory Card
All the images and sound files in the built-in memory are copied to the
SD Memory Card at once. Before copying the images, make sure that there is enough space on the SD Memory Card.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [2}{].
SD
5
Press the 4 button.
All the images and sound files are copied to the SD Memory Card.
5
To Copy Files from the SD Memory Card to the Built-in Memory
Selected images and sound files from the SD Memory Card are copied to the built-in memory one at a time.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [{}2].
5
Press the 4 button.
6
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select the image/
sound file you want to copy.
218
7
Press the 4 button.
The selected image/sound file is copied to the built-in memory.
To copy other images or sound files, repeat Steps 4 to 7. Select
[Cancel] to exit the settings.
• If sound (Voice Memo) has been recorded with the image, the sound file is copied with the image.
• When a file is copied from the SD Memory Card to the built-in memory, it is assigned a new file name.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 219 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is the format for storing print order data on still pictures captured with a digital camera. Once the print order data has been stored, the pictures can be printed according to the DPOF settings using a DPOF-compatible printer or photo processing lab.
DPOF cannot be set for movies or sound-only files.
If the picture already has the date and/or time imprinted on it (p.145), do
not set [Date] O (On) in DPOF settings. If you select O (On), the imprinted date and/or time may overlap.
Printing a Single Image
Set the following items for each image.
Copies For setting the number of prints. You can print up to 99 copies.
Date Specify whether you want the date inserted on the print or not.
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select r (DPOF).
DPOF
2 / 2
F o r t h e p r i n t s e t t i n g s .
U s e f u l w h e n p r i n t i n g a t a p r i n t i n g s e r v i c e
MENU
Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting [Single Image] or [All Images] appears.
OK OK
5
219
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 220 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Single Image].
Single Image
5
5
Press the 4 button.
The message [Applies DPOF settings to this image] appears.
To make DPOF settings for another image, use the four-way controller
(45) to select another image.
If DPOF settings have already been made for an image, the previous number of copies and date setting (O (On) or P (Off)) will be displayed.
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the number of
copies.
Applies DPOF settings to this image
Copies
Date
00
Date
7
Use the Green button to choose whether to insert the date or not.
Applies DPOF settings to this image
O
(On) The date will be imprinted.
Copies
Date
01
P
(Off) The date will not be imprinted.
Date
To continue setting DPOF print order data, use the four-way controller
(45) to choose another image and repeat steps 6 and 7.
8
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved and the screen shown in Step 4 reappears.
Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab, the date may not be imprinted on the pictures even if On is selected in the DPOF settings.
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in step 6 and press the 4 button.
220
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 221 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Printing All Images
When you choose the number of copies and whether or not to insert the date, the settings are applied to all the images stored in the camera.
1
Select [All Images] in step 4 on p.220.
2
Press the 4 button.
The message [Applies DPOF settings to all images] appears.
3
Choose the number of copies and whether to insert the date or not.
Refer to steps 6 and 7 in “Printing a
Single Image” (p.220) for details of
how to make the settings.
Date
Applies DPOF settings to all images
Copies
Date
01
4
Press the 4 button.
The settings for all the images are saved and the camera returns to the
DPOF setting screen.
5
• The number of copies specified in the DPOF settings applies to all the images. Before printing, check that the number is correct.
• Settings for single images are canceled when settings are made with
[All Images].
221
222
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 222 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 223 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
6
Recording and
Playing Back Sound
Recording Sound (Voice Recording Mode)
................................................................... 224
Adding a Voice Memo to Images ........... 228
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 224 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Recording Sound (Voice Recording
Mode)
You can record sound with the camera. The microphone is located on top of the camera. When recording sound, aim the microphone at the sound source to obtain the best sound quality.
Microphone/Speaker
6
Setting Voice Recording
To use the Voice Recording function, register Voice Recording to the
Green Button.
When the shooting mode is set to 9 (Green) Mode, [Green Button] settings cannot be configured on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure the settings, first switch to a mode other than 9.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [Green Button].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Voice
Recording] and press the 4
button.
Green Button
Green Mode
Voice Recording
Fn Setting
MENU Cancel
5
Press the 3 button.
The Voice Recording function is registered to the Green Button.
OK OK
224
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 225 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Recording Sounds
Shutter release button
Green Button
1
Press the Green button in A
mode.
The camera enters Voice Recording mode. The remaining recordable time and the recording time of the current file appear on the display.
1 Recording time
2 Remaining recordable time
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording starts. The self-timer lamp and REC icon (red) flash during recording.
When the Green button is pressed during recording, an index is added to the current sound file.
Index
Stop
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording stops.
1 2
• If you press and hold down the shutter release button for more than one second in step 2, recording continues until you take your finger off the button. This is useful for recording short sounds.
• Sound is saved in WAVE monaural files.
• In O (Voice Recording) mode, pressing the 4/W button only turns off the LCD and changes the display to Normal Display.
6
225
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 226 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Playing Back Sound
You can play back the sound files you made with Voice Recording.
f /y button
Q
button
Four-way controller
6
1
Press the Q button.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a sound
file to play back.
3
Press the four-way controller
(2).
1 2
Playback starts.
1 Total file recording time
2 Playback time
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
0 0 : 0 1 : 3 0
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Four-way controller (2)
Zoom button (y)
Pauses playback
Increases the volume
Zoom button (f) Reduces the volume
If there are no recorded indexes:
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
Reverses playback
Fast forwards playback
If there are recorded indexes:
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
Plays back starting from the previous index
Plays back starting from the next index
The following operations can be performed while playback is paused.
Four-way controller (2) Resumes playback
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
Rewinds approx. 5 seconds
Advances approx. 5 seconds
226
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 227 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Press the four-way controller (3).
Playback stops.
6
227
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 228 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Adding a Voice Memo to Images
6
You can add a voice memo to your still pictures.
Recording a Voice Memo
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the still picture to which you want to add a voice memo.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select \ (Voice
Memo).
Voice Memo 2 / 2
A t t a c h e s s o u n d t o i m a g e s .
R e c o r d i n g i s p o s s i b l e t i l l t h e m e m o r y c a r d i s f u l l
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
Recording starts.
1 0 0 - 0 0 3 8
0 1 : 3 1 : 4 4
5
Press the 4 button.
Recording stops.
• A voice memo cannot be added to the image that already has a voice
memo. Delete the old voice memo (p.177) and record a new one.
• A voice memo cannot be added to protected images (p.181).
228
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 229 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Playing Back a Voice Memo
f
/y button
Q button
Four-way controller
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to
choose the still picture with the voice memo that you want to play back.
U
appears on images with voice memos in single-image display.
2
Press the four-way controller
(2).
Playback starts.
6
Edit
The following operations can be performed during playback.
Zoom button (y) Increases the volume
Zoom button (f) Reduces the volume
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
Playback stops.
229
230
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 230 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 231 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Settings
Camera Settings ...................................... 232
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 232 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Camera Settings
Formatting an SD Memory Card
Formatting deletes all the data on the SD Memory Card.
Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
• Do not remove an SD Memory Card while it is being formatted. This may damage the card and make it unusable.
• Formatting deletes protected images and any data recorded on the card with a computer or any camera.
• SD Memory Cards formatted on a computer or device other than this camera cannot be used. Be sure to format the card with the camera.
• The built-in memory cannot be formatted except when an error occurs.
7
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Format].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Format].
Format
All data deleted
Format
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
232
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 233 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changing the Sound Settings
You can adjust the volume of operation sounds and change the type of sound.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound].
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Sound
The [Sound] screen appears.
Operation Volume
Playback Volume
Start-up Sound
Shutter Sound
Operation Sound
Self-timer Sound
1
1
1
1
MENU
To Change the Operation Volume/Playback Volume
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Operation Volume].
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Set the volume to f to mute the start-up sound, shutter sound, operation sound, and self-timer sound.
6
Change [Playback Volume] in the same way as in steps
4 and 5.
7
To Change the Sound Type
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start-up Sound].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the sound type.
Choose from [1], [2], [3], [4], [Off], or [USER].
233
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 234 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Press the 4 button.
8
Set [Shutter Sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer
Sound] in the same way as in steps 4 to 7.
9
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the [W Setting] menu.
Changing the Sound (Using a Recorded Sound File)
You can use a sound recorded by the camera for sound settings.
The first two seconds of the selected sound file will be played as the
[USER] sound.
1
Select [USER] in step 6 in “To Change the Sound Type”.
2
Press the 4 button.
The playback screen for the recorded sound files appears.
7
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select a sound file.
Play back the selected file to confirm.
Four-way controller (2): Plays back the first two seconds of the sound file.
Four-way controller (3): Stops playback.
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected sound is set as the [USER] sound.
5
Set [Shutter sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer
Sound] in the same manner.
6
Press the 3 button.
The screen returns to the [W Setting] menu.
The Sound settings are saved when the camera is turned off.
234
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 235 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changing the Date and Time
You can change the initial date and time settings (p.55). You can also
set the style in which the date appears on the camera.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Date
Adjustment].
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Date Adjustment
Date Format mm/dd/yy 24h
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
Date
Time
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
Depending on the initial setting or previous setting, [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/ mm/dd] may be displayed.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the date and
time display style.
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
6
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].
MENU Cancel
7
235
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 236 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
7
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [24h] (24-hour
display) or [12h] (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
8
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
9
Press the four-way controller
(3).
The frame moves to [Date].
MENU Cancel
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
10
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to one of the following items depending on the date style set in step 5.
Month for [mm/dd/yy]
Day for [dd/mm/yy]
Year for [yy/mm/dd]
The following operations and screens use [mm/dd/yy] as an example.
The operations are the same even if another date style has been selected.
11
Use the four-way controller
(23) to change the month.
Date Adjustment
Date Format mm/dd/yy 24h
Date
Time
01/01/2010
00:00
Settings complete
MENU
Cancel
12
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the day field. Use the four-way controller (23) to change the day. After changing the day, change the year in the same manner.
236
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 237 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
13
Change the time in the same way as in steps 8 to 12.
If you selected [12h] in step 7, the setting switches between am and pm corresponding to the time.
14
Press the four-way controller
(3) to select [Settings
complete].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date mm/dd/yy 24h
01/01/2010
Time 00:00
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
15
Press the 4 button.
The date and time settings are saved and the screen returns to the
[W Setting] menu.
When you press the 4 button in step 15, the camera clock is reset to
00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.
Setting the Alarm
You can set the alarm to ring at a specified time.
You can choose whether the alarm will ring at the same time every day or only once at the set time.
7
Setting the Alarm
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Alarm].
237
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 238 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
The Alarm screen appears.
Alarm
Alarm
Time
Off
00:00
14:14
7
Settings complete
MENU
Cancel
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the alarm.
Choose from [Off], [Once], or [Everyday].
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to the [Time] field.
8
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the hour field.
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the hour,
then press (5).
The frame moves to the minute field.
Change the minutes in the same manner.
10
Press the 4 button.
11
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Settings complete].
12
Press the 4 button.
When the alarm is set to [Off], the settings are saved and the screen returns to the [W Setting] menu.
Check that [Alarm] is set to P (Off).
When the alarm is set to [Once] or
[Everyday], [Alarm is set] is displayed and the power turns off.
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
MENU Exit
1/4
01/01/2010
Standard
English
238
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 239 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Checking the Alarm
1
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Alarm] on
the [W Setting] menu.
Check that [Alarm] is set to O (On).
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
The Alarm screen appears.
Check the alarm frequency and time.
Alarm
Alarm
Time
Once
14:25
14:14
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Turning the Alarm Off
The Clock mode screen appears and the alarm rings for one minute when the set time is reached while the camera is turned off.
You can stop the alarm by pressing any button on the camera while the alarm is ringing.
• The alarm will not ring if the camera is on when the set time is reached.
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is being performed.
7
Setting the World Time
The date and time selected in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.55) and
“Changing the Date and Time” (p.235) serve as the W ( Hometown) date
and time. By using the world time function, you can display the time in a city other than the Hometown (X Destination). This is useful when taking pictures in a different time zone.
239
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 240 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
To Set the Destination
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [World
Time].
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
World Time
Select Time
Destination
New York
DST
14:25
Hometown
New York
DST
14:25
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select
X
(Destination).
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Destination] screen appears. The city that is currently selected blinks on the map.
6
Use the four-way controller
(45) to change the
Destination city.
The current time, location and time difference of the selected city appear.
Destination
City
DST
New York
TimeDif.
14:25
+0:00
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].
8
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P
(Off).
Select O (On) if the Destination city uses daylight saving time.
9
Press the 4 button.
The [World Time] setting is saved.
240
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 241 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
10
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Select W (Hometown) in step 4 to set the city and DST setting for the
Hometown city.
To Display the Time of the Destination (Select Time)
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [World
Time].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Select Time].
World Time
Select Time
Destination
London
Hometown
New York
DST
19:25
DST
14:25
MENU
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select
X
(Destination) or
W
(Hometown).
World Time
Select Time
Destination
London
Hometown
New York
X
Displays the time of the
Destination city
MENU Cancel
W
Displays the time of the
Hometown city
DST
19:25
DST
14:25
OK OK
7
241
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 242 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
When X (Destination) is selected in step 6, the X icon appears on the display to indicate that the destination date and time are displayed in A mode.
P
3 8
7
Setting the Text Size on the Menu
You can set the text size of the item selected with the cursor on the menu to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Text Size].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the text size.
Select from [Standard] or [Large].
Setting
Sound
Date Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
1/4
01/01/2010
Standard
Large
MENU
Exit
OK
OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
242
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 243 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed.
The camera supports the following 20 languages: English, French,
German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Japanese, Danish,
Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian,
Thai, Korean, and Chinese (traditional and simplified).
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Language/
].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/ ] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the
language.
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The menus and messages are displayed in the selected language.
7
243
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 244 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Changing the System for Naming Folders
You can change the system for naming the folders for storing images.
When the naming system is set to the date, pictures are saved in separate folders by the date they were taken.
Choice
Date
(Default)
PENTX
_USER
The name of the folder xxx_mmdd (3-digit folder number_month day)
* xxx_ddmm (3-digit folder number_day month) when the date format is set to [dd/mm/yy]
A folder is made by day, and the images and sound files of the day are saved in the folder. xxxPENTX (xxx is the 3-digit folder number)
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder. xxxAAAAA (xxx is the automatically given 3-digit folder number, and
AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered)
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder.
Image taken on April 1 with the folder name setting set to [Date] created.
A folder with the name
“100_0401” is created.
The images are saved in the “100_0401” folder.
Image taken on April 8 with the folder name setting set to [Date] created.
A folder with the name
“100_0408” is created.
The images are saved in the “100_0408” folder.
Image taken on April 10 with the folder name setting set to [PENTX] created.
A folder with the name
“102PENTX” is created.
The images are saved in the “102PENTX” folder.
Image taken on April 15 with the folder name setting set to [PENTX] created.
A new folder is not created.
The images are saved in the “102PENTX” folder.
DCIM DCIM
100
100_0401
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
• Up to 900 folders can be created.
• Up to 9999 images or sounds can be saved in a folder.
DCIM
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
102
102PENTX
DCIM
100
100_0401
101
101_0408
102
102PENTX
244
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 245 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Selecting a Rule for Naming Folders
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Folder
Name].
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
A pull-down menu appears.
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
2/4
Date
PENTX
_USER
Auto
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the rule for
naming folders.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Naming the Folder Yourself
You can name the folder in which to save images.
You can enter up to five numbers and letters.
The 5-digit name is displayed after the 3-digit folder number.
1
Select [_USER] in step 4 in “Selecting the Rule for
Naming Folders”.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
The folder naming screen appears.
“_USER” has already been entered.
Folder Name
A B C D E F G H I J
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Settings complete
K L M
U S E R
MENU Cancel OK Enter
7
245
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 246 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
letter to enter, and press the 4 button.
The first letter is fixed and the cursor moves to the second letter.
4
Repeat step 3 and enter the remaining letters.
5
Press the four-way controller
(4) while “A” is selected, or
press (35) while “_” is
selected.
Folder Name
A
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0
B
1
C
2
D
3
E
4
F
5
G
6
H
7
I
8
J
9
K L M
Settings complete
P A R T Y
The frame moves to [Settings complete].
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
6
Press the 4 button twice.
The folder name is fixed, and returns to the [W Setting] menu.
• You can move the cursor by pressing the zoom button.
• The name of the folder that was set is displayed in the [R Setting] menu.
7
Changing the Video Output Format
When you connect the camera to AV equipment, choose the appropriate video output format (NTSC or PAL) for taking and playing back images.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Video Out].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
246
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 247 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a video output
format.
Choose the video output format to match the output format of the AV equipment.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Setting
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MENU Cancel
2/4
Date
MSC
NTSC
PAL
OK OK
Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail to be played back if the video output format is set differently from the one in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment 1p.184
Video Output Format by City 1p.300
Selecting the HDMI Output Format
When you connect the camera to AV equipment with an HDMI cable, set the appropriate video output resolution for playing back images. The default setting is [Auto].
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [HDMI Out].
3
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Setting
Folder Name Date
2/4
A pull-down menu appears.
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MSC
Auto
1080i
720p
480p
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
247
7
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 248 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select an output
format.
Choose the HDMI output format to match the output format of the AV equipment.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
The items on the pull-down menu vary depending on the selected Video output format.
To change the display, set the Video output format before setting the
HDMI output format.
The table below shows the combinations of the Video output format and
HDMI output.
Resolution
Video output format
NTSC PAL
Auto (The largest size that both the TV and camera support is automatically selected)
1080i (1920×1080i)
720p (1280×720p)
480p (1920×1080i) 576p (720×576p)
248
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 249 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Eye-Fi Communication
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar devices via wireless LAN using a commercially available Eye-Fi card.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Eye-Fi].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
Setting
Folder Name Date
2/4
O
Turns on communication using an Eye-Fi card
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
MSC
NTSC
Auto
P
Turns off communication using an Eye-Fi card
MENU
Exit
4
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
• To establish an Eye-Fi communication, you first have to specify a wireless LAN access point and transfer destination on the Eye-Fi card.
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
• The Eye-Fi setting returns to the default setting when the camera is turned off.
7
249
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 250 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
You can adjust the brightness of the display to 7 levels.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Brightness
Level].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to adjust the
brightness.
Setting
Folder Name
2/4
Date
MSC
NTSC
Auto
F
Dark
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
G
Normal
MENU Exit
H
Bright
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
The display appears with the set brightness.
250
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 251 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Using the Power Saving Function
You can save battery power by setting the display to dim automatically when no operation is performed for a fixed time. After the power saving function has been activated, the display returns to the ordinary brightness if any button is pressed.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Power
Saving].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the time until
the camera enters power saving mode.
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
Choose from [2min.], [1min.], [30sec.],
[15sec.], [5sec.] or [Off].
MENU Cancel
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
3/4
2
1 min.
min.
30 sec.
15
5 sec.
sec.
Off
OK OK
7
• Power Saving does not function in the following situations:
- While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode
- In the playback mode
- During movie recording
- While the camera is connected to a computer
- When using the AC adapter
- While a menu is being displayed
- In the (Digital Microscope) mode
• When no operation is performed after the camera is turned on, Power
Saving is activated only after 15 seconds elapse even if [5sec.] is set.
251
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 252 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Setting Auto Power Off
You can set the camera to turn off automatically when no operation is performed for a fixed time.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Power
Off].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the time until
the camera turns off automatically.
Choose from [5min.], [3min.] or [Off].
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU Cancel
3 / 4
5 sec.
5 min.
3 min.
Off
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Auto Power Off does not function in the following situations:
• While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode
• While recording a movie
• During a slideshow or movie/sound playback
• While the camera is connected to a computer
• While recording sound in Voice Recording mode
• While images are being transferred in Eye-Fi communication.
252
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 253 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the Quick Zoom Function
While playing back images in Q mode, you can set whether to use
Quick Zoom to enlarge the playback image to 10× when pressing the y button once.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quick
Zoom].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between O
(On) or P (Off).
O
(On) The Quick Zoom is available.
P (Off) The Quick Zoom is not available.
MENU Exit
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
5 sec.
3 min.
3/4
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
7
253
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 254 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Setting the Guide Display
Set whether to display the guide for the Capture Mode Palette or
Playback Mode Palette.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Guide
Display].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to switch between O
(On) or P (Off).
O (On) The mode guides are displayed.
P
(Off) The mode guides are not displayed.
Setting
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
MENU
Exit
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
5 sec.
3 min.
3/4
254
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 255 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Perform Pixel Mapping
Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective pixels in the CCD sensor. Run the Pixel Mapping function if image dots always seem to be defective in the same place.
• Pixel Mapping is only available in A mode. Pixel mapping cannot be selected even if the [W Setting] menu is displayed by pressing the
3 button in Q mode.
• When executing Pixel Mapping from Q mode, press the Q button once to enter A mode. Then press the 3 button and the fourway controller (5) to display the [W Setting] menu and select Pixel
Mapping.
• Pixel Mapping cannot be selected in Voice Recording mode.
1
Press the 3 button in A mode, and then press the
four-way controller (5) once.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Pixel
Mapping].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Pixel Mapping].
Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor and corrects defective pixels
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped and corrected.
7
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC88 (optional) or use a battery with ample capacity remaining.
255
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 256 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
7
Registering the Subscreen Image
(Subscreen Input)
You can choose the subscreen image displayed on the upper-left corner of the display.
• One of the 3 pre-installed screens
• One of your own images (compatible images only)
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select D
(Subscreen Input).
Subscreen Input
S e t t o d i s p l a y t h e s e l e c t e d i m a g e o n s h o o t i n g s c r e e n
1 / 2
MENU
Cancel
OK
OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image for
the subscreen.
Only images suitable for the subscreen are displayed. You can also choose one of the 3 pre-installed screens already stored in the camera.
5
Press the 4 button.
The subscreen image is set.
MENU OK
Once the subscreen image has been set, it will not be deleted even if the original image is deleted or the SD Memory Card is formatted.
256
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 257 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Changing the Start-up Screen
You can choose the start-up screen displayed when the camera is turned on.
You can choose any of the following images as the start-up screen:
• The Guide Display Start-up Screen showing a guide to the shooting modes and buttons
• One of the 3 pre-installed screens
• One of your own images (compatible images only)
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).
The Playback Mode Palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select ^ (Start-
up Screen).
Start-up Screen
F o r s e t t i n g a c a p t u r e d i m a g e a s t h e S t a r t - u p
S c r e e n
MENU
Cancel
3
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(45) to choose the image for
the start-up screen.
Only images suitable for the start-up screen are displayed. You can also choose one of the 3 pre-installed screens or the Guide Display Start-up
Screen already stored in the camera.
5
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
2 / 2
OK OK
7
257
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 258 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• Once the start-up screen has been set, it will not be deleted even if the original image is deleted or the SD Memory Card is formatted.
• Select [Off] to hide the start-up screen.
• The start-up screen is not displayed when you turn the camera on in the playback mode.
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) mode cannot be used for the start-up screen.
7
Resetting to Default Settings (Reset)
You can reset the camera settings to their defaults. Refer to “Default
Settings” (p.295) for the reset settings.
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2) to select [Reset].
Reset
Returns to default settings
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The settings return to the defaults.
The following settings are not affected by resetting:
• Date Adjustment
• World Time
• Language/
• Video Out
• The folder name that you created
258
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 259 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Displaying the Clock Mode
You can use the camera as a clock. With the camera turned off, press and hold down the 4 button to display the clock on the display.
4 button
1
Press and hold down the 4
button.
The camera turns on and the clock appears on the screen.
The camera turns off automatically after approximately 10 seconds.
Pressing the power switch turns the camera off immediately.
7
259
260
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 260 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Memo
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 261 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
8
Connecting to a
Computer
Setting Up Your Computer ..................... 262
Connecting to a Windows PC ................ 269
Connecting to a Macintosh .................... 279
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi
Card .......................................................... 285
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 262 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting Up Your Computer
8
By installing the software included on the provided CD-ROM on your computer and connecting the camera to your computer with the USB cable, you can transfer images and movies captured with your camera to the computer and then display and manage them. This section explains how to install the provided software and the other necessary preparations for enjoying the captured pictures and movies on your computer.
Provided Software
The following software is included in the provided CD-ROM (S-SW102).
• Image viewing/managing/editing software “MediaImpression 2.0
for PENTAX”
(12 languages: English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese,
Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Russian, Chinese [traditional and simplified],
Korean, and Japanese)
It is recommended to use the optional AC adapter kit K-AC88 when the
camera is connected to a computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of
power while images are being transmitted to a computer, the data may be lost or damaged.
262
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 263 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
System Requirements
The following system requirements must be met for you to fully enjoy the images and movies captured with the camera on your computer.
Windows
OS
CPU
Memory
Hard Disk Space
Monitor
Others
Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista or Windows 7
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest version.
Pentium 4 1.6 GHz or equivalent AMD Athlon (Intel Core 2 Duo
2.0 GHz or equivalent AMD Athlon X2 processor recommended)
512 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)
300 MB minimum
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color monitor or higher
CD-ROM drive
USB port as standard equipment
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows
NT/Windows 2000 are not supported.
Macintosh
OS
CPU
Memory
Hard Disk Space
Monitor
Others
Mac OS X (Ver.10.3.9, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6)
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest version.
PowerPC G4 800 MHz processor (or equivalent to Power PC
G5 with Intel Core Duo processor recommended)
512 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)
300 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color monitor or higher
CD-ROM drive
USB port as standard equipment
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.
8
263
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 264 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Installing the Software
Windows
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression
2.0 for PENTAX).
8
• Make sure your Windows PC meets the system requirements before installing the software.
• When multiple accounts have been set up, log on with an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your Windows PC on.
2
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW102) into the CD-ROM drive.
The “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” installer screen appears.
If you are using Windows Vista
When the [AutoPlay] screen appears, display the language selection screen following the steps below.
1) Click [Run setup.exe].
2) Click [Allow].
If the installer screen does not appear
Display the installer screen following the steps below.
1) Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop.
2) Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW102)] icon.
3) Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
3
Click [ArcSoft].
The “Choose Setup Language” screen appears.
264
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 265 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Choose a language, and click
[OK].
The setup screen appears.
Follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
5
Click [Finish].
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” installation is complete.
6
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.
The window closes.
Macintosh
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression
2.0 for PENTAX).
1
Turn your Macintosh on.
2
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW102) into the CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW102) icon.
4
Double-click the [Pentax Software Installer] icon.
The “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” installer screen appears.
8
265
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 266 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
5
Click [ArcSoft].
The setup screen appears.
Follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
6
Click [Close].
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” installation is complete.
7
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.
The window closes.
Product Registration on the Internet
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration.
8
If your computer is connected to the
Internet, please click [Product Registration] on the setup screen after the language selection screen is displayed.
The world map screen shown on the right for Internet Product Registration is displayed. Click the displayed country or region and then follow the instructions to register your product.
Only customers in countries and regions displayed on the software installation screen can register their products on the Internet Product
Registration.
266
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 267 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the device to which the camera is connected with the USB cable.
Make sure to set the USB connection mode before connecting your camera to the computer. You cannot perform the following setting if the camera is already connected to your computer with the USB cable.
1
Turn your camera on.
2
Press the 3 button in Q mode.
The [W Setting] menu appears.
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way controller (5) once.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USB
Connection].
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
A pull-down menu appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [MSC].
Setting 2/4
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Date
MSC
PTP
Auto
OK OK MENU Cancel
6
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
7
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.
Proceed to the following pages depending on your computer.
Connecting to a Windows PC 1 p.269
Connecting to a Macintosh 1 p.279
8
267
8
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 268 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the Optio W90 to your computer.
268
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 269 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Connecting to a Windows PC
Connecting the Camera and Your Windows PC
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the provided USB cable
(I-USB7).
1
Turn your Windows PC on.
2
Turn your camera off.
3
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the USB cable.
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark facing the front side of the camera.
4
Turn your camera on.
The “AutoPlay” screen appears.
If the “AutoPlay” screen does not appear, follow the steps in “When the
“AutoPlay” Screen Does Not Appear” (p.271).
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC88 when the
camera is connected to the computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of
power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image data may be lost or damaged.
The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a PC, whereas it blinks while the card is being accessed.
8
269
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 270 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Transferring Images
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Windows PC.
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the built-in memory will be transferred to your Windows PC.
5
Click [Import media files to local disk].
The “MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX” starts.
6
Set up [Destination Folder] and select [Subfolder Name].
8
7
Select the image you want to copy, then click [Import].
The selected images are copied to the
PC.
270
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 271 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
8
Click [Done].
When the “AutoPlay” Screen Does Not Appear
5
Double-click the
[MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX] icon on the desktop.
6
Click [Import].
7
Specify [Get Media From].
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name appears instead of [Removable Disk]. A new unformatted SD Memory
Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.
8
271
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 272 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
8
Set up [Destination Folder] and select [Subfolder Name].
9
Select the image/s you want to copy, then click [Import].
The selected images are copied to the
PC.
10
Click [Done].
8
Images are stored in folders named by the shooting date (“XXX_0808” for August 8. “XXX” is a three-digit number.).
If [PENTX] is selected for [Folder Name] in the [W Setting] menu, a folder named “XXXPENTX” (XXX is a three-digit folder number) is displayed. If
[_USER] is selected for [Folder Name], “xxxAAAAA” (xxx is a three-digit folder number, AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered) is displayed. The images are stored there.
272
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 273 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Windows PC
1
Double-click the [Safely
Remove Hardware] icon in the task bar.
The “Safely Remove Hardware” screen appears.
2
Select [USB Mass Storage
Device] and click [Stop].
The “Stop a Hardware device” screen appears.
3
Select [USB Mass Storage
Device] and click [OK].
A message appears indicating that the hardware can be safely removed.
8
273
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 274 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
4
Click [OK], then click [Close].
5
Disconnect the USB cable from your Windows PC and the camera.
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”, the camera cannot be disconnected until the application is closed.
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the
USB cable is disconnected from your Windows PC or the camera.
8
Starting “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” lets you view, edit, manage, search for, share, and print images.
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX] icon on the desktop.
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” starts and the main window appears.
274
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 275 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Media Window Interface
A
B
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Media browser tool
You can view images, movies, or play back audio files.
B Edit/Managing tool
You can edit or manage images. For example, you can import, edit or print images.
8
275
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 276 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Media Browser Interface
A
B
C
8
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Views
Displays the configuration of folders in your computer. When you browse a folder, the contents of the folder appear in the media thumbnail pane.
B Preview Area
Displays the contents of the selected folder or the results of the most recent search (the file or folder that matches the search item).
C Actions
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing, editing, movie making.
276
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 277 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Viewing Images
1
Click [Pictures], [Videos], or
[All Media] from the main window.
2
Select and click the folder containing the image you want to view in the folder pane.
Images are displayed in the media thumbnail pane.
3
Select and double-click the image you want to view in the media thumbnail pane.
The selected image is displayed with the viewer.
With the viewer, you can enlarge/ reduce the display size of the image or edit it and so on. You can also play back movies or sound files.
Photo Viewer
The image is displayed on the “Photo
Viewer” screen if you double-click the image file directly without starting
MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX.
With the viewer, you can enlarge/reduce the display size of the image or edit it and so on. You can also play back movies or sound files.
8
277
8
278
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 278 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX”
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX” by using the help pages.
1
Click [Help] from [Extras] on the menu bar.
The help screen appears.
2
Click the desired topic.
An explanation is displayed.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 279 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Connecting to a Macintosh
Connecting the Camera and Your Macintosh
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the provided USB cable
(I-USB7).
1
Turn your Macintosh on.
2
Turn your camera off.
3
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the USB cable.
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark facing the front side of the camera.
4
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as [NO_NAME] on the desktop.
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC88 when the
camera is connected to the computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of
power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image data may be lost or damaged.
8
279
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 280 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name appears instead of [NO_NAME]. A new unformatted SD Memory Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.
• The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a Macintosh, whereas it blinks while the card is being accessed.
Transferring Images
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Macintosh.
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the built-in memory will be transferred to your Macintosh.
5
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the
[Applications] folder.
6
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX] icon.
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” starts and the main browser window appears.
7
Set up [Destination Folder] and select [Subfolder Name].
8
8
Select the image you want to copy, then click [Import].
The selected images are copied to the
PC.
280
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 281 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Click [Done].
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Macintosh
1
Drag [NO_NAME] on the desktop to the trash.
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, drag the icon of that name to the trash.
2
Disconnect the USB cable from your Macintosh and the camera.
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”, the camera cannot be disconnected until the application is closed.
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the
USB cable is disconnected from your Macintosh or the camera.
8
281
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 282 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Starting “MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX”
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” lets you view, edit, manage, search for, share, and print images.
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the
[Applications] folder.
2
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX] icon.
“MediaImpression 2.0 for PENTAX” starts and the main browser window appears.
Media Window Interface
B
A
8
282
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Media browser tool
You can view images, movies, or play back audio files.
B Edit/Managing tool
You can edit or manage images. For example, you can import, edit or print images.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 283 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Media Browser Interface
A
B
C
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.
A Views
Displays the configuration of folders in your computer. When you browse a folder, the contents of the folder appear in the media thumbnail pane.
B Preview Area
Displays the contents of the selected folder or the results of the most recent search (the file or folder that matches the search item).
C Actions
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing, editing, movie making.
8
283
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 284 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Viewing Images
1
Click [Pictures], [Videos], or [All Media] from the main window.
2
Select and click the folder containing the image you want to view in the folder pane.
Images are displayed in the media thumbnail pane.
3
Select and double-click the image you want to view in the media thumbnail pane.
The selected image is displayed with the viewer.
With the viewer, you can enlarge/ reduce the display size of the image or edit it and so on. You can also play back movies or sound files.
8
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX”
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression 2.0 for
PENTAX” by using the help pages.
1
Select [MediaImpression] from [Help] on the menu bar.
The help screen appears.
2
Click the desired topic.
An explanation is displayed.
284
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 285 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi
Card
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar devices via wireless LAN using a memory card that is equipped with the wireless LAN (Eye-Fi card) function.
1
Specify the wireless LAN access point and transfer destination on the Eye-Fi card.
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
2
Turn the camera off.
3
Insert an Eye-Fi card that has been set up.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Set [Eye-Fi] in the [W Setting] menu to O (On).
The images are transferred automatically. For details on how to set up
the camera, refer to “Setting the Eye-Fi Communication” (p.249).
The following icons appear on the display.
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or searching for the access point when
[Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. When [Eye-Fi] is set to
P (off).
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date or the card is write-protected.
8
Acceptable Eye-Fi cards
• Eye-Fi Share
• Eye-Fi Share Video 4 GB
Run the latest firmware on your Eye-Fi card.
285
8
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 286 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• When you use a new Eye-Fi card, copy the install file of Eye-Fi
Manager stored on the card to your computer before you format the card.
• Do not use an Eye-Fi card, or set [Eye-Fi] to P (Off) in a location where wireless LAN devices are restricted or prohibited, such as on planes
(since images are transferred via wireless LAN).
• If you insert an older version Eye-Fi card in the camera, an error message appears.
• Images are not transferred in the following cases:
- When available wireless LAN access points are not found.
- When the battery level is low ( (yellow) or (red) is indicated).
• Voice recording sound files cannot be transferred.
• We recommend that you use an AC adapter (optional) when you transfer a large number of images because this often requires long transferring times.
• While images are being transferred, the Auto Power Off does not function.
• If you transfer large-sized files, such as a movie, the temperature inside the camera increases and the camera may be automatically turned off to protect the circuit.
• To transfer images via wireless LAN, use of an access point, an
Internet environment, and configuration are required. For details, refer to the Internet website (http://www.eye.fi).
• For details on how to use an Eye-Fi card, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
• If you have a problem with the Eye-Fi card, contact the manufacturer of the card.
• The camera is equipped with a function that sets Eye-Fi communication on or off, however, this does not guarantee availability of all the functions on the Eye-Fi card.
• Use of the Eye-Fi card is permitted only in the country where you purchased the card. Follow the laws of that country.
286
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 287 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Appendix
Functions Available for Each Shooting
Mode ......................................................... 288
Messages ................................................. 291
Troubleshooting ...................................... 293
Default Settings ....................................... 295
List of World Time Cities ........................ 300
Optional Accessories ............................. 301
Main Specifications ................................ 302
Warranty Policy ....................................... 307
Index ......................................................... 312
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 288 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Functions Available for Each Shooting
Mode
9
√: Can be set. ×: Cannot be set. ⎯: Settings and changes are not applied.
Shooting Mode
Function
Zoom button Zoom operation
I
button
Face Detection On
Smile Capture
Flash Mode
Face Detection Off
, Auto a
Flash Off b
Flash On c
Auto + Red-eye d
Flash On + Red-eye b Soft Flash
9
Standard
Drive Mode g Z Self-timer jc
Continuous Shooting/
Burst Shooting hi Remote Control k Interval Shoot l
Auto Bracket
Focus Mode
[A Rec.
Mode] menu
= Standard q
Macro
1cm Macro
3 Pan Focus s
Infinity z Manual Focus
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
AF
Setting
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Sensitivity
ISO Correction in AUTO
EV Compensation
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
*1
Blink Detection
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment)
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light b A A C
√
*2
√
*3
√
*3
√
*4
√
*3
√
*4
√ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
×
√ √ √
√
√
√
√
√ √
× ×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √
×
√
√
√
×
√
×
√ √
× ×
√ √ √
×
√ √ √
×
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
√
√
×
√
× ×
√
×
√
×
√ √ √
√ √ √
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√ √ ×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
*9
√ √ √
×
*9
×
*9
√
*11
√
*11
√
*11
√
*12
√
*11
√
*12
√
√
×
√ √ √ ×
*20
√
×
*20
×
*22
√ √ √ ×
*22
×
*22
×
*23
√ √ √
*24
√ √
*24
√ √ √ √
√ √ √
×
√
√
√
×
×
*26
√ √ ×
*26
×
*26
×
*26
√ √ √ ×
*27
√
×
*27
√ √ √ ×
*29
√
×
*29
×
*31
√ √ √
×
*8
√ √ √
√
√
√
√
√ √ √
×
*8
√
×
*8
√ √ √ ×
*8
√ ×
*8
×
*32
√ √ √ ×
*32
×
*32
√ √ √
×
*8
√
×
*8
√ √ √ √ √ √ q I
B
\ U D
√
*3
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
*32
√
√
×
*9
√
*11
√
×
*22
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
*26
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
P
R
B
√
*3
√
*5
√
√
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
× ×
*8
√
×
√
×
×
×
×
√
√
√
×
×
*32
√
√ √
√
×
*25
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
×
√
√
×
×
×
*9
√
×
√
√
√
×
√
*11
×
*13
√ √
×
*22
√
√ √
√
√
×
*26
√
√ √
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ ×
*8
288
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 289 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
X c Q C S F N
9
Shooting Mode
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
*6
√
*3
√
*6
√ √
*3
√
*3
√
*6
√
*7
√ √
×
√ √ √ √ √
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ √
√ √
√ √
√ √
×
√
×
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
√
×
×
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ √
√
√
√
√ √
√ √
×
×
×
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
*9
×
*9
×
*9
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
×
×
√
×
*10
×
*14
×
*15
√ √
*11
√ √
*16
×
*17
×
*18
×
*19
√
√
×
*22
×
*22
×
*22
√
√
√
√ √
√
√
√ ×
√
√
*23
×
√
√ √
√
√ √ √ × √
√
×
*26
×
*26
×
*26
√
√
√
*24
√
√
√
×
×
√
*22
√
√
√
*26
×
×
×
×
×
×
*21
*22
*23
*25
*25
*26
×
×
*8
*8
×
*27
√ √ ×
*28
√
×
*30
√ √
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
×
*30
⎯
√
√
√
×
*27
√
√
×
×
*31
*8
√ √
×
*8
×
*8
×
*8
√
×
*8
√ √ √
×
*8
√ √
×
*25
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ √
√ √
√ √
×
√
√
×
√
×
*32
×
*32
×
*32
√
√
√
×
√
×
*32
×
*32
√
√
√
×
√
×
*8
√
×
*8
Zoom operation
Face Detection On
Smile Capture
Face Detection Off
,
Auto a
Flash Off b
Flash On c Auto + Red-eye d
Flash On + Red-eye b Soft Flash
9
Standard g Z Self-timer jc
Continuous Shooting/
Burst Shooting hi Remote Control k Interval Shoot l Auto Bracket
= Standard q
Macro
1cm Macro
3 Pan Focus s
Infinity z Manual Focus
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Focusing Area
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AF Setting
AE Metering
Sensitivity
ISO Correction in AUTO
EV Compensation
D-Range Setting
Pixel Track SR
*1
Blink Detection
Sharpness
Saturation (Tone Adjustment)
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
Function
Zoom button
I
button
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Focus Mode
[A Rec.
Mode] menu
9
289
9
290
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 290 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
*1 Movie SR is used for movies, while
Pixel Track SR is used for still pictures.
*2 Flowers cannot be detected when using Digital Zoom or Intelligent Zoom.
*3 Optical zoom is always possible, digital zoom and intelligent zoom cannot be used if the Sensitivity selection is ISO 3200/6400.
*4 Before shooting only optical zoom and digital zoom are possible, during shooting only digital zoom is possible.
*5 Only optical zoom and intelligent zoom are possible, digital zoom cannot be used.
*6 Only optical zoom is possible, digital zoom and intelligent zoom cannot be used.
*7 Only optical zoom and digital zoom are possible, intelligent zoom cannot be used.
*8 Fixed to P (Off)
*9 Fixed at Natural
*10 Fixed at Bright
*11 Fixed to f/W when the
Sensitivity selection is ISO 3200/6400.
*12 Set in [Movie] on the [A Rec. mode] menu
*13 Fixed to L
*14 Fixed to h for individual pictures, and fixed to f for composite images.
*15 Fixed to f/W
*16 Fixed to i for individual pictures, and fixed to f for composite 3 images.
*17 Fixed to h/L
*18 Fixed to
V
*19 Fixed to E
*20 Fixed to C (Best) equivalent
*21 Fixed to D (Better)
*22 Fixed to F
*23 Fixed to J (Multi)
*24 W (Automatic Tracking) is not available
*25 Fixed to O (On)
*26 Fixed to L (Multi-segment metering)
*27 Fixed to AUTO
*28 The sensitivity is fixed at its minimum setting
*29 Fixed at 80-800
*30 Fixed at 80-6400
*31 Fixed at ±0.0
*32 Fixed as standard
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 291 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Messages
Messages such as the following may appear on the display during camera operation.
The card memory is not enough to copy images/ sounds
Image folder cannot be created
Message
Battery depleted
Memory card full
Memory card error
The built-in memory is not formatted
Card is not formatted
Card is locked
Compression error
No image/sound
Movie recording stopped
Deleting
Camera cannot play this image and sound
Protected
Description
The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery using the
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images can be saved.
Insert a new SD Memory Card or delete unwanted images.
Change the recorded pixels or quality level of recorded
Shooting and playback are impossible due to a problem with the SD Memory Card. You may be able to display or copy the images on the card using a computer.
The data within the built-in memory are damaged. Format the built-in memory.
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is unformatted or has been formatted on a computer or other device and is not compatible with this camera. Format the SD Memory
The SD Memory Card is write-protected (p.47).
This message occurs when the camera fails to compress an image. Change the quality level or recorded pixels of the image and try shooting or saving it again.
There are no image or sound files on the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.
This message appears when the internal temperature of the camera has exceeded normal operating limits while recording a movie.
This message appears when deleting an image or sound file.
You are trying to play back an image or sound in a format not supported by this camera. You may be able to play it back on another brand of camera or on your computer.
The largest file number (9999) has been assigned to an image in the largest folder number (999) and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or
The image or sound file you are trying to delete is protected.
9
291
9
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 292 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Message
Data being recorded
Data being processed
Description
Displayed when you try to switch to Q mode while an image is still being recorded, or when the protect setting or
DPOF setting is being changed. It disappears after the image is recorded or the setting is changed.
Displayed when the camera takes more than five seconds to display an image due to image processing, or when the
SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is being formatted.
Displayed if the built-in memory is full when saving a file.
Built-in memory full
No image to be processed
This image/sound cannot be processed
Displayed when there are no images or sound files.
Displayed for files that cannot be processed.
No card in the camera
Displayed if no SD Memory Card is inserted when “Image/
Sound Copy” is selected from the Playback Mode Palette and the OK button is pressed.
The built-in memory is not enough to copy images/sounds
Cannot process correctly
Display image/sound from built-in memory
Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping
No more images can be selected
The camera will turn off to prevent damage from overheating
Displayed when there is insufficient built-in memory to perform copying.
Displayed when Red-eye Compensation processing fails.
Displayed when the camera enters the built-in memory display.
Displayed when the batteries are too low during Pixel
Mapping. Change the batteries (p.39) or use the AC
adapter kit K-AC88 (optional) (p.43).
Displayed when you select more than the maximum number of images.
Appears when the temperature inside the camera exceeds the highest limit.
292
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 293 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Troubleshooting
Problem
The camera will not turn on
No image appears on the display
The display is hard to see
The shutter will not release
The picture is dark when using the flash
Cause Remedy
The battery is not installed
The battery is installed incorrectly
Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a battery.
Check orientation of the battery.
Reinsert the battery according to the
+-
symbols in the battery
The battery is exhausted Charge the battery.
The camera is connected to a computer
The camera is connected to a TV
The display is set to off.
The brightness level of the display is set too dark
The display is off when the camera is connected to a computer.
The display is off when the camera is connected to a TV.
Press the 4/W button to turn the display on.
Adjust the brightness level in
[Brightness Level] in the [W Setting]
Power Saving function is on
The flash is charging
There is no available space on the SD Memory Card or in the built-in memory
Recording
The subject is too far away in a dark environment, such as a night scene
When the Power Saving function is on, the display automatically darkens after a certain amount of time. Press a button to return to the normal brightness level.
Select [Off] in [Power Saving] in the
[W Setting] menu to turn the Power
Pictures cannot be taken while the flash is charging. Wait until charging is finished.
Insert an SD Memory Card with available space or delete unwanted
Wait until recording is finished.
The picture becomes dark if the subject is too far away. Take pictures within the specified flash range.
9
293
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 294 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Problem
The subject is not in focus
Cause
The subject is difficult to focus on with autofocus
The subject is not in the focusing area
Remedy
The camera may have difficulty in focusing on such subjects as: low contrast subjects (a white wall, a blue sky, etc.), dark subjects, finelypatterned objects, rapidly-moving objects. It is also difficult to get proper focus when shooting through
shooting using the focus lock, or
\
Locate the desired subject in the focus frame (focusing area) in the center of the display. If it is difficult to do so, first lock the focus on the desired subject (focus lock), and then move the camera to recompose.
Set to , (Auto) or b (Flash On)
The flash does not discharge
The flash mode is set to a
(Flash Off)
The Drive Mode is set to j
(Continuous Shooting), c (Burst Shooting), or l (Auto Bracket); the Focus Mode is set to s
(Infinity); or the Shooting
Mode is set to d (Movie),
(Underwater Movie),
S (Fireworks), or
(Digital Microscope).
The flash does not discharge in these modes.
Very occasionally, static electricity may cause camera to malfunction. In this case, remove the battery and install it again. If the camera is then working properly, you can continue using the camera.
294
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 295 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Default Settings
The table below lists the factory default settings.
The meaning of the indications for menu items with a default setting is explained below.
Last Memory Setting
Yes : The current setting (last memory) is saved when the camera is turned off.
No : The setting returns to the default setting when the camera is turned off.
*
—
: The setting depends on the [Memory] setting (p.158).
: N/A
Reset Setting
Yes : The setting returns to the default setting with the Reset
No
—
: The setting is saved even after reset.
: N/A
[A Rec. Mode] Menu Items
Item
Image Tone
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
White Balance
Focusing Area
AF
Setting
Auto Macro
Focus Assist
AE Metering
Sensitivity
ISO Corction in AUTO
EV Compensation
Default Setting
(Shooting mode:A)
L
Bright
E
(4000×3000)
D
(Better)
F
(Auto)
J
(Multiple)
O (On)
O
(On)
(Multi-segment)
AUTO (80-800)
80-800
±0.0
Last
Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
*
*
*
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
9
295
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 296 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Item
Recorded Pixels
Movie
D-Range
Setting
Movie SR
Interval
Shoot
Interval
Total Time
Start
Delay
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Pixel Track SR
Interval
Interval
Shoot
Number of Shots
Start Delay
Blink Detection
Digital Zoom
Instant Review
Face Detection
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
Memory
Focus Mode
Zoom Position
MF Position
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
AE Metering
Digital Zoom
DISPLAY
File No.
Green Button
Sharpness
Saturation
Tone Adjustment
Contrast
Date Imprint
Macro Light
Default Setting
(Shooting mode:A)
Last
Memory
Setting
Reset
Setting
M
(1280×720/30 fps)
O
(On)
1 min.
10 min.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
In 0 hr. 0 min.
P (Off)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
0 min. 10 sec.
G
G
G
P
P
2
In 0 hr. 0 min.
O (On)
O
(On)
O (On)
P
(Off)
O (On)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
P
(Off)
P (Off)
O
(On)
P (Off)
O
(On)
Green Mode
G
(Normal)
(Normal)
(B&W)
(Normal)
(Off)
(Off)
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
296
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 297 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
[W Setting] Menu Items
Item Default Setting
Sound
Date
Adjustment
Alarm
World Time
Text Size
Language/
Folder Name
USB Connection
Video Out
Operation Volume
Playback Volume
Start-up Sound
Shutter Sound
Operation Sound
Self-timer Sound
Date Format (Date)
Date Format (time)
Date
Time
Alarm
Time
Select Time
Destination (City)
Destination (DST)
Hometown (City)
Hometown (DST)
HDMI Out
Eye-Fi
Brightness Level
Power Saving
Auto Power Off
Quick Zoom
Guide Display
Reset
Delete All
Pixel Mapping
Format
* Except the folder name that you created
3
3
1
1
1
1
According to initial setting
24h
1/1/2010
According to initial setting
P
(Off)
0:00
Same as W
Hometown
According to initial setting
P (Off)
According to initial setting
P
(Off)
Standard
According to initial setting
Date
MSC
According to initial setting
Auto
P
(Off)
G
5 sec.
3 min.
P
(Off)
O
(On)
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Last Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes*
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Page
9
297
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 298 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Playback Mode Palette Items
Item
Slideshow
Interval
Screen Effect
Sound Effect
Image Rotation
Small Face Filter
Ink Rubbing Filter
Collage
Recorded Pixels
Layout
Background
Select image(s)
Digital Filter
Original
Frame
Blur
Edge Composite
Frame Composite
Save as Still Image
Movie
Edit
Divide Movies
Adding title picture
Red-eye Compensation
Subscreen Input
Resize
Cropping
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Image/Sound Copy
Voice Memo
Single Image/Sound
Protect
All Images/Sounds
DPOF
Single Image
All Images
Image Recovery
Start-up Screen
Default Setting
3 sec.
Wipe
On
Normal
Approx. 7%
3 h/L
White
⎯
B&W
All sides/White
All sides/White
Default1
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Default start-up screen 1
Depending on the picture taken
Depending on the picture taken
Depending on the picture taken
Built-in memory →
SD Memory Card
⎯
Depending on the recorded image/sound
Depending on the recorded image/sound
Copies: 0
Date: Off
Cancel
O
(On)
Last
Memory
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
No
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Reset
Setting
Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯ ⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Yes
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Yes
298
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 299 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Key Operation
Item
Q
button w
/x button
Function
Operation Mode
Zoom Position
Default Setting
Q
Mode
Full wide-angle
2 Drive Mode 9 (Standard) *
Four-way controller
3
Shooting Mode b (Auto Picture) Yes
4
Flash Mode
,
(Auto)
*
5
Focus Mode *
3 button Menu Display
= (Standard)
Shooting mode:
[A Rec. Mode] menu
Playback mode:
[W Setting] menu
⎯
4/W button
Information
Display
Standard *
I
button
Operation Mode
Green Button
Function Recall
Face Detection
On
Green Mode
*
Yes
Last
Memory
Setting
⎯
*
Reset
Setting
⎯
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
⎯
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
⎯
9
299
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 300 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
List of World Time Cities
9
City: indicates cities that can be set as either the Initial Setting (p.51) or
Video Output Format: indicates the video output format of the city set as the Initial Setting.
Region
North
America
Central and
South
America
Europe
Africa/West
Asia
City name
Honolulu
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Toronto
New York
Halifax
Mexico City
Lima
Santiago
Caracas
Buenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
Lisbon
Madrid
London
Paris
Amsterdam
Milan
Rome
Copenhagen
Berlin
Prague
Stockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
Athens
Helsinki
Moscow
Dakar
Algiers
Johannesburg
Video output format
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
Region
Africa/West
Asia
East Asia
Oceania
City name
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
Jeddah
Tehran
Dubai
Karachi
Kabul
Male
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho Chi Minh
Jakarta
Hong Kong
Beijing
Shanghai
Manila
Taipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Video output format
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
300
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 301 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with the camera.
Power supply
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88 (*)
Battery charger kit K-BC88 (*)
(Battery charger D-BC88, AC plug cord)
AC adapter kit K-AC88
(AC adapter D-AC64, DC coupler D-DC88, AC plug cord)
The battery charger and AC adapter are only sold as a set.
Cable
USB cable I-USB7 (*)
AV cable I-AVC7 (*)
Strap
O-ST103 (*)
O-ST104 (*)
O-ST24
O-ST8
O-ST81
Genuine leather strap.
Silver chain strap.
Waterproof strap.
Camera case
O-CC103
Optio W90 Skin
O-CC1032 (available in the near future)
This cover protects the camera from scratches and light impacts.
Remote Control
REMOTE CONTROL WATERPROOF O-RC1 (available in the near future)
REMOTE CONTROL E
REMOTE CONTROL F
9
301
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 302 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Main Specifications
9
Type
Number of effective pixels
Image sensor
Number of recorded pixels
Sensitivity
File format
Quality level
Storage media
Fully automatic compact digital still camera with built-in zoom lens
Approx. 12.1 megapixels
1/2.3 inch CCD
Still
E
(4000×3000), U (4000×2256),
6 (3072×2304), V (3072×1728), f (2592×1944), W (2592×1464), h (2048×1536), L (16:9) (1920×1080), l (1024×768), m (640×480)
* Fixed at f/W in Digital SR mode.
* Fixed at h/L in Frame Composite mode.
* Fixed at f in Digital Wide mode, however, the first frame uses h.
* Fixed at i for one frame in Digital Panorama mode.
* Fixed at L in Digital Microscope mode.
* Fixed at f/W when the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.
* Fixed at f/W in Burst Shooting mode.
* Fixed at
V (1280×960) in Report mode.
Movie
M
(1280×720/30 fps), F (1280×720/15 fps)
G
(640×480/30 fps), H (640×480/15 fps)
I
(320×240/30 fps), J (320×240/15 fps)
AUTO, Manual (ISO 80-6400)
* The sensitivity is fixed at AUTO (80-6400) in Digital SR mode.
Still JPEG (Exif 2.2), DCF 2.0, DPOF,
PRINT Image Matching III
Movie
Sound
AVI (Motion JPEG), approx. 30 fps/15 fps, PCM system, monaural sound, Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)
Voice memo, voice recording: WAVE (PCM) system, monaural
Still
Movie
C “Best”, D “Better”, E “Good”
Fixed at C (Best) *Unchangeable
Built-in memory (approx. 26.7 MB), SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory
Card
302
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 303 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Recording Time
Still
E
U
6
V f
W h
L
V l m
(4000×3000)
(4000×2256)
(3072×2304)
(3072×1728)
(2592×1944)
(2592×1464)
(2048×1536)
(1920×1080)
(1280×960)
(1024×768)
(640×480)
C
6 pictures
7 pictures
9 pictures
10 pictures
10 pictures
13 pictures
16 pictures
24 pictures
38 pictures
59 pictures
122
Built-in Memory pictures
D
11 pictures
14 pictures
16 pictures
20 pictures
20 pictures
27 pictures
33 pictures
48 pictures
71 pictures
100 pictures
190 pictures
E
18 pictures
20 pictures
22 pictures
30 pictures
30 pictures
41 pictures
48 pictures
65 pictures
100 pictures
131 pictures
214 pictures
512 MB
SD Memory Card
C
107 pictures
126 pictures
160 pictures
192 pictures
192 pictures
239 pictures
299 pictures
438 pictures
686 pictures
1042 pictures
2158 pictures
D
209 pictures
253 pictures
299 pictures
368 pictures
368 pictures
479 pictures
592 pictures
863 pictures
1259 pictures
1777 pictures
3358 pictures
863 pictures
1162 pictures
1777 pictures
2324 pictures
3777 pictures
E
321 pictures
368 pictures
397 pictures
530 pictures
530 pictures
737 pictures
• The image storage capacity is for reference only. The actual image storage capacity may vary depending on the SD Memory Card and the subject.
• V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when (Report) mode is set.
Movie/Sound
M
(1280×720/30 fps)
F
(1280×720/15 fps)
G
(640×480/30 fps)
H
(640×480/15 fps)
I
(320×240/30 fps)
J
(320×240/15 fps)
Sound
Built-in Memory
8 sec.
16 sec.
24 sec.
46 sec.
37 sec.
1 min. 8 sec.
7 min. 17 sec.
512 MB
SD Memory Card
2 min. 30 sec.
4 min. 53 sec.
7 min. 11 sec.
13 min. 36 sec.
10 min. 56 sec.
20 min. 8 sec.
2 hr. 8 min. 56 sec.
9
303
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 304 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• The above figures are based on our standard shooting conditions and may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions and type of the SD Memory Card used.
• Recording can continue until the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card is full, or the size of the recorded movie reaches 2 GB (when using an SDHC card). If recording stops at 2 GB, start recording again to continue to record the rest of the movie in blocks of 2 GB.
9
White balance
Lens
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Tungsten Light, Fluores. Light, Manual
Focal Length 5.0 - 25.0 mm
(approx. 28 mm - 140 mm in 35 mm equivalent focal length)
Aperture F3.5 (W) - F5.5 (T)
Lens Composition 11 elements in 9 groups (5 aspherical elements)
Optical zoom
Intelligent zoom
Zoom Type Electrically driven
5×
6
/V: approx. 6.5×, f
/W: approx. 7.7×, h
: approx. 9.8×, L: approx. 10.4×, l
: approx. 19.5×, m
: approx. 31.3× (when combined with optical zoom)
Digital zoom Max. approx. 6.25× (combines with 5× optical zoom to give zoom magnification equivalent to 31.3×)
Motion blur reduction Still Electronic shake reduction (Pixel Track SR),
Hi-sensitivity shake reduction (Digital SR)
Display
Movie Electronic movie shake reduction (Movie SR)
2.7 inch wide-LCD, approx. 230,000 dots (AR coating (Cover Glass only))
Playback modes
Focus mode
Focus
Single-frame, 6-frame, 12-frame, Enlargement (max. 10×, scrollable),
Face Close-up Playback, Pet Close-up Playback, Folder Display,
Calendar Display, Sound Playback, Histogram Display, Bright and
Dark Area Compensation, Select & Delete, Slideshow, Resize,
Cropping, Image/Sound Copy, Image Rotation, Digital Filter, Original
Frame, Ink Rubbing Filter, Collage, Small Face Filter, Movie
Playback/Edit (Save as Still image, Divide, Adding title picture),
Frame Composite, Red-eye Compensation, Subscreen, Voice Memo,
Protect, DPOF, Image Recovery, Start-up Screen
Autofocus, Macro, 1cm Macro, Pan Focus, Infinity, Manual Focus
Type
Focus range
(From lens face)
TTL contrast detection system by sensor
Multiple (9-point autofocus)/spot/automatic tracking AF changeable
Standard : 0.5 m -
∞ (Full zoom range)
Macro : 0.1 m - 0.6 m (Full zoom range)
1cm Macro : 0.01 m - 0.3 m (At the intermediate position of the zoom range)
* It is possible to switch to Infinity, Pan Focus and
Manual Focus.
* Face Detection AF is available only when the camera recognizes the subject’s face.
Focus Lock By half-pressing the shutter release button
304
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 305 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Exposure control
Face detection
Pet detection
Shooting mode
Digital filter
Movie
Shutter speed
Built-in flash
Drive mode
Self-timer
Time function
Power source
Battery life
AE Metering Multi-segment metering, Center-weighted metering, Spot metering
EV Compensation ±2 EV (can be set in 1/3 EV steps)
Detection of up to 32 people’s faces (up to 31 face detection frames on the display), Smile Capture, Blink Detection
* Face Detection AE is available only when the camera detects the subject’s face.
Registering: 3, Detecting: 1
Auto Picture, Program, Night Scene, Movie, Underwater, Underwater
Movie, Landscape, Flower, Portrait, Digital Wide, Surf & Snow, Digital
SR, Kids, Pet, Sport, Fireworks, Candlelight, Night Scene Portrait,
Text, Food, Digital Panorama, Frame Composite, Report, Digital
Microscope, Green, Voice Recording (can be used when Fn Setting assigned)
B&W, Sepia, Toy Camera, Retro, Color (red, pink, purple, blue, green, yellow), Extract Color (red, green, blue), Color Emphasis (Sky Blue,
Fresh Green, Delicate Pink, Autumn Leaves), High Contrast,
Starburst (Cross, Heart, Star), Soft, Fish-eye, Brightness Filter
Continuous
Recording Time
Approx. 1 second - until built-in memory or SD Memory
Card is full (however, maximum size is limited to 2 GB)
1/1500 sec. - 1/4 sec., max. 4 sec. (Night Scene mode)
Modes
Flash Range
Auto, Flash Off, Flash On, Auto + Red-eye, Flash
On + Red-eye, Soft Flash
Wide-angle: approx. 0.3 m - 3.9 m
(approx. 0.98 ft - 12.8 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)
Telephoto: approx. 0.3 m - 2.5 m
(approx. 0.98 ft - 8.2 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)
Single-frame, Self-timer (approx. 10 sec., approx. 2 sec.), Continuous
Shooting, Burst Shooting, Remote Control (3-sec Remote Control,
0-sec Remote Control), Interval Shoot, Auto Bracket
Electronic control type, control time: Approx. 10 sec., 2 sec.
World Time 75 cities (28 time zones)
Clock Mode
Alarm
Clock display by holding down 4/W button while camera is turned off (approx. 10 sec.)
Alarm with simultaneous display of the Clock mode at specified time
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI88, AC adapter kit (optional)
Image Storage
Capacity
Approx. 205 pictures
* Recording capacity shows approximate number of shots recorded during CIPA-compliant testing
(with display on, flash used for 50% of the shots, and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may vary according to operating conditions.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
Playback Time
Approx. 250 min.
Movie Recording
Time
Approx. 85 min.
Sound Recording
Time
Approx. 300 min.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
* According to the results of in-house testing.
9
305
9
306
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 306 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Interfaces USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible) /PC/AV terminal /HDMI terminal
Video output format NTSC/PAL (monaural)
Waterproof and dustproof rating
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68) Continuous underwater picture-taking possible for 2 hours at depth of 6 m.
Impact resistance rating
Dimensions
PENTAX drop test (1.2 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.
* Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to impact such as being dropped or hit.
* The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damages under every condition.
Approx. 107.5 (W) × 59.0 (H) × 25.0 (D) mm (excluding operating or protruding parts)
Weight
Accessories
Approx. 144 g (excluding battery and SD Memory Card)
Approx. 161 g (including battery and SD Memory Card)
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery, battery charger, AC plug cord,
USB cable, AV cable, software (CD-ROM), strap, Carabiner strap, Operating Manual, Quick Guide
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 307 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Warranty Policy
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering, battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions, or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties, whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment or to the manufacturer. If there is no representative of the manufacturer in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner. If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing, please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the service station to proceed with the servicing.
9
307
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 308 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the warranty policy.
9
308
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 309 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material, which may require special handling. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
9
309
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 310 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We: PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
Located at: 600 12 th
Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera
Model Number: Optio W90
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: February, 2010, Colorado
310
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 311 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be treated separately and in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these products.
Following the implementation by member states, private households within the EU states may return their used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated collection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise arise due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemicals involved.
9
311
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 312 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Index
9
Symbols
Mode ...................... 16, 64
button ..................... 61, 63
Q
Mode ..................... 16, 64
Q
button .................... 60, 62
Menu .................... 69, 295
[W Setting] Menu ....... 71, 297
9
Green Mode ................. 86
i
Delete ................. 162, 176
f
/y button ...................... 62
Magnify ....................... 173
x
Tele ............................... 87
Control ........................ 106
h
Control ........................ 106
Wide ............................ 87
w
/x button ...................... 60
b Auto Picture ................. 83
A Night Scene ................. 90
C
Movie .......................... 150
Q
Surf & Snow ................. 97
\ Sport ............................. 97
c Digital SR ................... 90
Kids ............................... 93
C
Pet ............................... 94
R Program ....................... 85
S
Fireworks ..................... 90
N
B Text ............................... 98
Digital Wide ............. 111
F
q Landscape ................... 79
I
Flower ........................... 79
Underwater ................ 148
312
D Food ...............................79
Report ..........................80
Digital Microscope .........99
Numerics
1cm Macro ...................119
A
AC adapter .........................43
AE Metering .....................130
Alarm ...............................237
Auto + Red-eye
(Flash) ....................117
Auto Bracket a ..............110
Auto Macro ......................122
Auto Picture Mode .............83
Auto Power Off ................252
Auto , (Flash) .................117
AV cable ..........................185
B
B&W filter .........................194
Basic Mode ........................86
Battery Level Indicator .......42
Blink Detection ...........77, 138
Brightness filter ................194
Brightness Level ..............250
Built-in Memory ................217
Built-in memory display ......64
Burst Shooting .................104
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 313 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
C
Calendar display .............. 166
Camera shake ............. 24, 89
Candlelight Mode .............. 90
Capture Mode Palette ....... 79
Changing volume ............ 233
Charging a battery ............. 38
Memory Card ............... 49
Clock Mode ..................... 259
Collage ............................ 200
Color emphasis filter ........ 194
Color filter ........................ 194
Connecting to a TV .......... 184
Continuous Shooting ....... 104
Contrast ........................... 145
Copy ................................ 217
Cropping .......................... 191
D
Date Adjustment ........ 55, 235
Date Imprint ..................... 145
Daylight saving time .......... 54
Default Settings ............... 295
Delete all ......................... 179
Delete i ................. 162, 176
Deleting sounds ............... 177
Digital Filter ..................... 194
Digital Microscope Mode ... 99
Digital SR Mode ................ 90
Digital Wide Mode ........... 111
Digital Zoom ...................... 89
Display brightness ........... 250
Display Language ............ 243
Dividing movies ............... 215
DPOF settings ................. 219
D-Range Setting .............. 134
E
EV Compensation ............133
Extract color filter .............194
Eye-Fi ......................249, 285
F
Playback .....................174
Face Detection ...................81
Filters ...............................194
Fireworks Mode .................90
Fish-eye filter ...................194
Flash Mode ......................117
Flash Off a (Flash) .........117
Flash On b (Flash) .........117
Flash On + Red-eye d
(Flash) ....................117
Flower ................................79
Focus Assist ....................123
Focus Mode .....................119
Focusing ..........................119
Focusing Area ..................121
Folder display ..................165
Folder Name ....................244
Food ...................................79
Format .............................232
Four-way controller ......61, 63
Frame Rate ......................152
G
Green button ....................139
Green button X ...........61, 63
Green Mode .......................86
Guide Display ....................33
9
313
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 314 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
9
H
HDMI ............................... 247
High contrast filter ........... 194
Highlight Correction ......... 134
Histogram .......................... 34
Hometown ................. 54, 239
I
Image Recovery .............. 180
Image Rotation ................ 172
Image Tone ..................... 124
Image/Sound Copy .......... 217
Infinity s ......................... 119
Initial Setting ...................... 51
Ink Rubbing Filter ............ 199
Installing a battery ............. 39
Installing the software ...... 264
Instant Review ........... 77, 139
Interval Movie Mode ........ 154
Interval Shoot k .... 108, 136
ISO Correction in AUTO ..................... 132
K
Kids Mode ......................... 93
L
Landscape ......................... 79
Language setting ....... 51, 243
M
Macintosh ........................ 263
Macro q .......................... 119
Macro Light ...................... 146
Magnify y ....................... 173
Manual Focus \ ........... 119
(White Balance) .......... 129
Mass Storage Class ........ 268
MediaImpression ............. 262
314
Memory ............................158
Movie Edit ........................214
MSC .................................268
Multi-segment
metering L ................130
N
Night Scene Mode .............90
Mode .............................90
Number of pixels ..............125
O
Operating the Menus .........65
Optional accessory ..........301
Original Frame .................209
P
Pan Focus 3 .................119
Panoramic Pictures ..........114
Pet Mode ...........................94
Photo processing lab .......219
Protocol ......................268
Pixel Mapping ..................255
Pixel Track SR .................135
Playback ..................162, 163
Playback (sound) .............226
Palette ................168, 298
Playing back movies ........163
Portrait Mode .....................91
Power Saving ...................251
Power switch ..........49, 60, 62
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 315 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
Press halfway (shutter release button) ............. 76
Product registration ......... 266
Program Mode ................... 85
Protect Z ...................... 181
Provided software ............ 262
PTP ................................. 268
R
Rec. Mode Menu ....... 69, 295
Recorded Pixels ...... 125, 152
Recording movies ............ 150
Recovering images .......... 180
Red-eye reduction
Design ............................ 8
Remote Control Unit ........ 106
Report ................................ 80
Reset ............................... 258
Resetting settings ............ 258
Resize ............................. 190
Retro filter ........................ 194
Rotating ........................... 172
S
Saturation ........................ 144
(movie) ....................... 214
Saving pictures by date ... 244
Saving settings ................ 158
SD Memory Card ............... 45
Select Time ..................... 241
Self-timer g .................... 103
Sensitivity ........................ 131
Sepia filter ....................... 194
Setting Menu ............. 71, 297
Shadow Correction .......... 134
Sharpness ........................143
Shooting information ..........24
Shooting Mode ...................78
Shutter release button ................60, 62, 76
Slideshow ........................169
Small Face Filter ..............192
Smile Capture ....................81
Soft filter ...........................194
Soft Flash b (Flash) ........117
Sound settings .................233
Sound types .....................233
Specifications ...................302
Sport Mode ........................97
Standard = ...................119
Starburst filter ..................194
Mode .............................50
Start-up screen ................257
Strap ..................................36
Subscreen ........................256
Subscreen Input ...............256
Surf & Snow Mode .............97
System requirements .......263
T
Taking pictures underwater ..................148
Text Mode ..........................98
Text Size ..........................242
Title picture of movie ........216
Tone Adjustment ..............144
Toy camera filter ..............194
U
Underwater Mode ............148
Mode ...........................148
USB Connection ..............267
9
315
OptioW90_OPM.book Page 316 Friday, February 26, 2010 8:10 AM
V
Video output format ................. 246, 300
Voice Memo .................... 228
Voice Recording .............. 224
W
Dustproof .................... 148
White Balance ................. 128
Windows .......................... 263
World Time ...................... 239
Z
Zoomxw ........................ 87
9
316
OPW900101/ENG
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe GmbH
(European Headquarters)
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse, 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY
(HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(Germany - http://www.pentax.de)
Hotline: 0180 5 736829 / 0180 5 PENTAX
PENTAX U.K. Limited
Austria Hotline: 0820 820 255 (http://www.pentax.at)
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough,
Berks SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk) Hotline: 0870 736 8299
PENTAX France S.A.S.
112 Quai de Bezons - BP 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex, FRANCE
(http://www.pentax.fr)
Hotline: 0826 103 163 (0,15€ la minute) Fax: 01 30 25 75 76
Email: http://www.pentax.fr/_fr/photo/contact.php?photo&contact
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
PENTAX Canada Inc.
PENTAX Trading
(SHANGHAI) Limited
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, AZ 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7, CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
OPW900101/ENG Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
FOM 01.02.2010 Printed in Europe
Digital Camera
Operating Manual
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read the Operating Manual before using the camera.
تنزيل
تم تحديث الرابط العام
رابط عام للمستند
إعلان
